JP6802493B2 - Rotating game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding the revolving game machine.

In the reel-type game machine (slot machine), one game is started when the game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of rotating the rotating cylinders (reels) in a plurality of rows and stopping the rotating cylinders by making full use of the rotating cylinder stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotating operation, a predetermined symbol is displayed on the effective line. (For example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up, a special gaming state in which the player is in a higher profit state than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small winning combination is higher than in the normal game state). ) Is generally the type that shifts to). Here, in the rotating cylinder type game machine, when an image or the like for directing to enhance the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotation operation and the stop operation of the reel. When operating the reel stop device, etc., it is configured to predict and enjoy the result of the game while comparing the design displayed on the reel with the image for production displayed on the display. There are many things that are done.

Further, in recent rotating drum type gaming machines, it is configured so that the presence or absence of winning a winning combination and the type of winning combination change according to the operation mode (operation order and operation timing) of the rotating cylinder stop device, for the player. Many machines (so-called AT machines) that assist by issuing operation instructions (navigation) so that an advantageous winning combination wins a prize have appeared. This AT machine has a state of issuing an operation instruction (AT state) and a state of not issuing an operation instruction (non-AT state), and the more the AT state continues, the more advantageous it is for the player. It has a lot of playability.

JP-A-2002-346037

However, there is a problem that further improvement of the control method in the AT machine is desired in order to create new playability and operability.

The rotating body type game machine according to this aspect is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Predetermined display means and
With the given lamp
The main control means to control the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub-control means to control the production
The main control means
Lottery means to draw lots and
It is equipped with a storage means that stores a specific table for deriving the production group information.
The lottery result that can be determined by the lottery means includes a first lottery result and a second lottery result.
In the game in which the first lottery result is determined, it is possible to stop and display the symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In the game in which the second lottery result is determined, it is possible to stop and display the symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the second operation mode.
As a game section, it has a normal section and an advantageous section.
In the game in which the first lottery result is determined in the normal section, the effect group information can be derived from the specific table by using a specific address as a reference address and the information corresponding to the first lottery result as an offset value. It is configured so that group information can be transmitted to the sub-control means.
In the game in which the second lottery result is determined in the normal section, the specific address is used as the reference address, the information corresponding to the second lottery result is used as the offset value, and the effect group information can be derived from the specific table. It is configured so that the production group information can be transmitted to the sub-control means.
The production group information derived in the game in which the first lottery result is determined and the production group information derived in the game in which the second lottery result is determined are the same information.
In the game in which the first lottery result is determined in the normal section, the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified by the predetermined display means.
In the game in which the first lottery result is determined in the advantageous section, there is a case where the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is notified by the predetermined display means.
If the conditions for starting the special gaming state are met, the special gaming state is configured to start.
It is configured so that it can be notified that it is an advantageous section by lighting the predetermined lamp.
When a game in which the number of times the game is executed in the advantageous section becomes a predetermined number of times is executed, the advantageous section is configured to end.
If a game in which the number of times the game is executed in the advantageous section is a predetermined number of times is executed in the special game state and the end condition of the special game state is not satisfied in the game, the next game is the normal section and the special game state. It is a rotating body type game machine characterized by being configured to be.
<Additional notes>
In addition, although other aspects different from this aspect are listed below, it is possible to carry out without any limitation.
The rotating body type game machine according to this other aspect is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
The main information display unit that can display information and
A sub-information display unit that can display information and
The main control means to control the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub-control means to control the production
The main control means is
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is equipped with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit.
Under the condition controlled by the notification state, at least in the game in which the predetermined combination is won, the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the main information display unit.
The sub-control means
In the game in which the predetermined combination is won, it is possible to execute the operation mode notification control for displaying the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch on the sub-information display unit.
When the operation mode notification control is executed, the case where the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed in the first display mode and the second display in which the display mode is different from the first display mode. There are cases where information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed depending on the mode.
The case of displaying the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch in the second display mode is better than the case of displaying the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch in the first display mode. , It is configured to increase the expectation that the player will be given benefits,
The operation mode notification control is in a situation where the remaining period related to the continuation period of the notification state is less than the predetermined period than in the situation before the remaining period related to the continuation period of the notification state is less than the predetermined period. The spinning type gaming machine is characterized in that the case where information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed in the second display mode is reduced when the above-mentioned second display mode is executed.
<Additional notes>
In addition, although other aspects different from this aspect are listed below, it is possible to carry out without any limitation.
The rotating body type game machine according to this other aspect is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
A main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information, and
A sub-information display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) connected to the main game unit is provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to control the notification state,
Under the situation controlled by the notification state, at least in the game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is mainly used. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A sub-information display control means for controlling the display of the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is provided.
An operation mode in which information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) in the game in which the predetermined combination is won. Notification control can be executed,
When the operation mode notification control is executed, information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed in the first display mode, and the first display mode. In the second display mode, which is different from the display mode of the above, there is a case where information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. ,
Rather than displaying information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in the first display mode, the predetermined combination is displayed in the second display mode. When displaying information that can identify the operation mode of the corresponding stop switch (for example, the stop button D40), the expectation that the privilege is given to the player is higher.
Information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in the first display mode when the operation mode notification control is executed when a specific condition is satisfied. However, in the second display mode, there is no case where information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. It is a rotating body type game machine characterized by being.

According to the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that the control method in the AT machine can be improved.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment with the door opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal insertion slot in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small wins, replay wins, and bonus appearance rates in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting changing device control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is an RT state transition diagram of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the AT in-state start control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an AT state transition diagram of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a power supply cutoff process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is an image diagram of a push order display in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to this example. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the sub-side power supply cutoff process on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special precursor processing at the time of starting lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the addition special processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an advantageous BB internal processing during operation of the start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the first cylinder stop reception reception process on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop reception reception process on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is an image 1 of an effect execution during AT in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is an image 2 of an effect execution during AT in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is an image 3 of an effect execution during AT in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is an image of executing the effect during AT in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a winning information generation table in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is an effect group number determination table 1 in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is an effect group number determination table 1 in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is an effect group number determination table 3 in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is an example of the configuration of the lottery table in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. It is a flowchart of the 1st body stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in a game machine. FIG. 57 is an image of executing the effect during AT in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image 6 of an effect execution during AT in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is an image diagram of a door opening error occurrence in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an example of the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 61 is an example of a game state transition diagram in the rotating cylinder type game machine according to this example.

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a rotating game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, as a random number). Is a hard random number, a built-in random number generated by the main control chip including the CPU, and a soft random number as a pseudo-random number). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, re-game roles) for shifting to special games, etc. Can be mentioned. The term "CPU" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) and processing performance used. "Power outage" means that the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine is below a certain level regardless of whether or not the power switch provided in the game machine is operated. For example, power supply It also includes the interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power outage. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and physically holds information (for example, "1" if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied, and conducts. If the element configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and holds information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, it is "1" if it is stored, and if it is not stored, it is not. It is set to "0". It should be noted that it is generally configured so that backup power is supplied to a part or all of the data held in the RAM at the time of power failure). The "game state" corresponds to, for example, a special game state in which a game medal is easily obtained and is advantageous to the player (a so-called big hit game, which is called a bonus game, a first-class BB, a second-class BB, or the like. ), Re-game probability fluctuation game state (RT state) in which the winning rate of the re-game combination is higher (or lower) than the normal game state in which the winning rate of the re-game combination is a predetermined value, and the winning combination. Examples include the stop order of the reels for winning a prize, an AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, and an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined. Further, even in the normal game state, the lottery probability of transition to the RT state, the AT state, and the ART state is different, the high probability normal game state, the low probability normal game state, etc. (in this example, it is referred to as the lottery state. ). In addition, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {Furthermore, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery for shifting to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side}. Further, in this example, the state related to AT and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the state related to AT is referred to as "normal gaming state". Collectively, the state related to ART may be referred to as a "normal game state" or the like as a state related to ART. The "winning combination" is the type (or condition device number) of the conditional device won by the internal lottery. The "notification state" is a state related to an AT capable of executing the push order navigation described later, and even if the game is won by a conditional device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order. , If the state related to AT is a state in which push order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be a "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as the "number of games that can be executed for notification games", and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "number of playable notification games" is 1 or more (the game in which "0" is set may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the "number of playable notification games", the difference number of game media (the number of payouts minus the number of input) obtained based on the winning of small wins (mainly the push order bell role) and the number of pushes The number of times the winning bell role is won may be adopted. Further, the "special notification state" is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and in this example, it is referred to as an "additional specialization state". Further, the "specific condition" is a condition in which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and the specific condition is, for example, that one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, and the like. "Type 1 special bonus" is a bonus that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate, and is predetermined. It operates when it is played, and the operation can be continued until the result of the game is obtained not more than 12 times, and it is sometimes called RB (regular bonus). The "type 1 special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the type 1 special accessory, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated in the above, and it may be called BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. The "Type 2 special bonus" is a bonus that activates the condition device related to the winning regardless of the result of the bonus lottery, and it operates when it is determined in advance, and the result of one game can be obtained. In that case, the operation is terminated, and it is sometimes called CB (challenge bonus). The "type 2 special bonus continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the type 2 special bonus, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated in the above, and it is sometimes called MB (middle bonus) or type 2 BB. The "ordinary accessory" is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number is activated, and is an accessory of a specific symbol. It is supposed to operate when the combination is displayed and end when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when a first-class BB combination wins a prize, it is regarded as JACIN, and the first-class BB is always in RB during execution. Further, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which the non-RB and the RB are repeatedly executed when the first type BB is executed. The "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in which the pull-in control that can be executed after the stop operation is not executed is not executed, and the reel is stopped at the closest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel of. The "all CB type" is a configuration that is always in the CB when the second type BB is executed. The "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function of each means, the on / off timing of flags, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described.

(This Embodiment)
Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure on the front side of the rotating cylinder type game machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The revolving game machine P mainly has a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet and a substrate), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPU MC is mounted) and a sub control board S (a board on which a sub control chip SC including a CPU SC is mounted). Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for enabling input of the game medium, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visible, the reel window D160, the input number indicator D210, the operation status indicator D180, the special game status display device D250, the credit number display device D200, and the payout number display device (Push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as push order display device D270), AT counter value display device D280, advantageous section display YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of the game medium and the input of the number of bets (number of bets), the medal insertion slot D170, the bet button D220, and the mechanism for enabling the payout of the inserted game medium are settled. Button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as a mechanism for operating the reel. The rotating drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment protrudes toward the player to which the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the medal insertion slot D170, the bet button D220, the settlement button D60, the sub input button SB, etc. are attached. It has a shaped console. Each element will be described in detail below.

<Mechanism for making the game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the game machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. Further, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of LEDs, and is configured so that the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting the game medals necessary for starting one game) are lit. Has been done. Further, the operation status indicator lamp D180 is composed of LEDs, and is configured to turn on and off according to the current operation status (medal acceptance / rejection status, re-game stop status, game start wait status, etc.). Further, the special game status display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. In addition, the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the total number of payouts may be made by the effect display device S40 (also referred to as the second information display unit) described later. By configuring to display, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can be a user-friendly game machine. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (number of credits) stored in the game machine as medals held by the player. Further, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is composed of a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button). The winning combination may differ depending on the stop order of D43) {so-called push order combination (sometimes referred to as a combination with push order), but when the winning combination and the symbol combination displayed as stop are different Is a reel that is most advantageous to the player in a game in which the profit margin (the number of payouts, the RT state after that, etc.) given to the player can be different. It is configured to be able to notify the stop order (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays, that is, the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that is most profitable to the player. Therefore, the display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays a game according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as the first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state related to AT that is advantageous for the player (in this example, it may be referred to as a push order navigation state or a notification game, and details will be described later), which will be guaranteed when the game progresses. It is configured as. The AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a configuration, the player may be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games whose state regarding the advantageous AT is guaranteed, and can be a user-friendly game machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a payout number display device and a push order display device.

Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of LEDs, and is configured to turn on when it is in the "advantageous section" and turn off when it is not in the "advantageous section" (for lighting and extinguishing timing). Will be described later). Here, in the reel-type game machine according to this example, as in the conventional reel-type game machine, it is easy to obtain a game medal and a special game state (so-called jackpot game, which is a bonus game) which is advantageous for the player. , 1st class BB, 2nd class BB, etc.), the winning rate of the replaying combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the replaying combination is a predetermined value. The re-game probability fluctuation game state (RT state), the stop order of the reels for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, and the RT state and the AT state are A compound ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "game states", any one of the three "game sections" of "normal section", "standby section" and "advantageous section". Can be set. In this example, the "waiting section" is not set, and either the "normal section" or the "advantageous section" is set. Of these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "game sections". For example, the "game state" is the AT state or the ART state. It is associated with an "advantageous section". That is, when the "game state" is in the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, but as will be described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also the setting control of the "game state". Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the game progress, whether or not the game progress status is relatively advantageous to the player depends on the lighting / extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. It is possible to tell the player without telling a lie. As will be described later, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, but in that case, it remains. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (the information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set "game section" also affects the transition of the "game state". It can be given, and as a result, it is possible to automatically suppress a significant increase in gambling due to a "game state" such as an AT state or an ART state, which has a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As described above, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the end condition of the "advantageous section" is not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the revolving game machine according to this example is the push that can acquire the small win with the largest number of payouts among the small wins that make up the "push order combination (combination with push order)". Sequential navigation One execution (for example, if there are seven, three, and one small winning combination as the small winning combination, the seven small winning combination with the largest number of payouts can be obtained. If there is a push order combination that can acquire 7 or 1 cards depending on the push order and a push order combination that can acquire 3 cards depending on the push order, the push order navigation that can acquire 3 cards is referred to here. "Not applicable to push order navigation)" or "Winning any of BB, RB, MB" and "Arbitrary end condition (non-winning (AT) in 40G 1 set loop lottery, fixed 32G" The end condition is to satisfy "Progress (precursor), etc.)" or "Advantageous section 1500G". In the case of a specification in which there is no push order bell combination (example: there is a push order for replay to shift the RT state, but there is no small combination in which the number of payouts differs depending on the push order). The condition for ending the advantageous section of "one push order navigation that can acquire the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts" is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, as the small winning combination constituting the pushing order combination, the small winning combination corresponding to the 11-card combination and the small combination including the small winning combination corresponding to the 1-card combination are formed, so that "the number of payouts is the largest". "One execution of push order navigation that can acquire small wins" refers to notifying the push order in which 11 medals can be obtained (11 wins can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling the input of the game medium will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for inserting medals, and the game medals inserted into the slot are guided to the inside of the game machine in a situation where medals can be accepted. Further, as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the game machine, and the medals are guided to the inside of the game machine. When it is determined that the game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet medal. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by a player, and is configured so that a stored medal (credit medal) can be bet by the operation. In addition, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medals (credit medals) and / or the bet medals can be refunded to the player by the operation. There is. The game medals refunded by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reel by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the reel operations can be sequentially stopped by operating the respective stop buttons. Has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating cylinder type game machine P by opening the front door DU of FIG. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be lit in various lighting modes as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game. (Fig.), Door substrate D for signal relay, medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, middle panel D (intermediate decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. ), The upper panel D130, the lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper portion of the front door DU on the back surface side so that the display unit for displaying the effect or the like can be visually recognized through the perspective region formed on the upper panel. Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the rotating cylinder type game machine P, and the decorative lamps are on the right side and the left side of the lower panel D140. A unit D150 is provided, and an LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right side and the left side of the upper panel D130. Further, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and input signals such as the above-mentioned stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60 are attached to the door board D. Is input, and has the function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M described later. Further, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided in the vicinity of the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU to detect medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and to simplify the detection. It has a function of performing proper authenticity, guiding the appropriate medal to the hopper H40 described later, and returning the inappropriate medal to the medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right below the door substrate D. The middle panel is an upper part of the operation console and a lower part of the upper panel D130, and is a panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub-input button SB attached to the operation console D190 described above is a member used for a button continuous striking effect or the like, and a mini game (for example, "AT in progress"" is performed by operating the sub-input button SB of the player. It is a member configured to be able to carry out progress such as (directing the success or failure of rushing into). The front door DU of the rotating body type game machine P can detect the open / closed state of the medal tray D230 for receiving the game medal (or simply called a medal) released from the discharge port D240 and the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and a key (door key) that matches the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Further, in the present embodiment, the error state (door opening error, etc.) can be canceled by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. There is.

Next, the back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a substrate) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to the substantially center of the back box so that a part thereof can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer circumference of the reel portion (on the reel band). Then, based on the operation of each stop button on the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is configured to enable the rotation operation and the stop operation of the respective reel portions. Further, although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are lit, the outer circumference of the reel portion is provided. It is configured so that the outer circumference of the reel portion can be visually recognized as if it were lit by the light transmitted through the reel. Further, above the reel M50, a rotating cylinder K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

Further, above the reel M50, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game, is stored, and on the left side of the reel M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. The sub-control board S, which will be described later, controls the control of various effects performed by using the above and the like. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process described later (for changing the setting), and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error. Button M30 is connected. Although the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown in FIG. 2, they may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M (that is, the front door DU is opened). If not, it may be installed in a position where artificial access is difficult).

Below the reel M50, a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals are provided, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire rotating game machine P. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H are paid out from the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating cylinder type game machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (sometimes referred to as a power supply unit E). The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the rotating drum type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s that serves as a passage for game medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 near the door substrate D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s, a game medal discharge port D240. A coin shooter D90 or the like is provided to guide the driver. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and accepting only game medals conforming to the standard dimensions, and it is determined that the insertion reception sensor D10s does not conform to this function. The medals (or other foreign matter) that have been awarded are configured to be refunded to the outlet D240 by the blocker D100. If a game medal is inserted before the player operates the start lever D50 (when the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medals are selected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only those that satisfy the standard are satisfied. The medals that have been inserted into the hopper H40 and do not meet the standards are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, if a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (when the insertion of the game medal is not valid), the inserted game medal is inserted regardless of whether or not the standard is satisfied. Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, inside the insertion reception sensor D10s (in the back of the flow path), a sensor related to medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided, and when a game medal that satisfies the dimensional standard and is accepted passes, the first insertion sensor D20s The signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s and is supplied to the main control board M described later.

Next, the sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. The game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The insertion reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it is turned on by pressing the two protruding mechanisms, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. .. Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign substance that is not a game medal (a foreign substance that does not satisfy the standard and has a diameter smaller than that of the game medal, for example) is inserted, two protruding mechanisms are pressed. Not done. Since the medal cannot maintain the standing state, such a medal cannot pass through the passage (the medal collapses), and is refunded to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine an error (as a result, the blocker D100 may be turned off) even when the ON time is continuous for a predetermined time or longer. ..

When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s immediately after passing. This input sensor (first input sensor D20s and second input sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (they are arranged adjacent to each other at intervals smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition order of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured in.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to the front view and the top view of the medal payout device H of FIG. The medal payout device H is operated by the settlement button in a state where credits (game medals electronically stored inside the game machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start the game) are present. It will be activated when the game medal is paid out by winning or winning. When operating, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disc H50 around the disc rotation shaft H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. The payout sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on / off status of each sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s on / off). Various errors can be detected by monitoring the transition order of the off combination, etc.) and the on / off time. More specifically, for example, when normally passing through the game medal outlet H60, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the release urging means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on, second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout Since the sensor state transition is as follows: sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off, if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , It can be exemplified that it is configured to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine in the present embodiment. The rotating cylinder type game machine according to the present embodiment has a specified number (maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20. The effective line for which the winning is determined is one line of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is one (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)-> bonus". For example, when the replaying role and the bonus are established at the same time, , The symbol combination that will be the replay role is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. In addition, when the bell and watermelon are established, if the stop button is pressed at the position where both can be pulled in (the position within 4 frames to the winning stop position), priority is given to the small winning combination with a large number of payouts. It is configured to retract. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 5 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if the line is changed to one line of the left reel M51 lower, the middle reel M52 middle, and the right reel M53 upper). In addition, as the pull-in control when the push order small winning combination, which gives different benefits to the player depending on the pushing order, is won, the small winning combination with a large number of payouts when operated in the predetermined correct push order. Is controlled to be pulled in with priority (number of sheets priority control), and if the operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order, the stop display is possible (within 4 frames from the stop operation). Control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning among the (arranged) symbols (the most likely to win among the combinations of multiple symbols that can be won).

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (Nos. 0 to 19), and the symbols are "Black Seven", "White Seven", and " There are 10 types: "sheep", "blank", "bell", "replay A", "replay B", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", and "cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol not constituting the winning combination, but a symbol constituting the winning combination including "blank". As a combination, for example, "watermelon B, replay A, blank" is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the type of symbol is increased / decreased or changed.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are a list of symbol combinations 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that one of the symbol combinations is stopped and displayed on the effective line (one line described above). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is easy for the player to align the same symbols in a row on the line other than the effective line (in the case of watermelon, in the middle row). Three watermelon symbols are aligned in a straight line on any of the reels, such as in a straight line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols serving as a first-class BB combination (a so-called first-class special accessory-related accessory continuous operation device, which may be simply referred to as a BB combination) is used. Type 1 BB-A (RB-A is operated continuously and ends with a payout of more than 264 sheets) "Sheep / Sheep / Sheep" and Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is operated continuously to end 132 sheets) "Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven" that will end with a payout that exceeds, and "White Seven / White Seven / that will end with a payout of more than 132 sheets by continuously operating RB-B). It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In addition, in this embodiment, when the first-class BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), one in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. It is configured to draw a winning combination (small combination, replaying combination) other than the winning combination by referring to the lottery table (a method in which the table referred to during the combination lottery is not switched during the execution of one BB). (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). The format of the first-class BB combination is not limited to this, and the table to be referred to at the time of the combination lottery may be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination corresponding to the 14th to 16th replays 04 is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to RT0 (for details on the RT state, refer to the details of the RT state. Will be described later). Since "RT0" is in an RT state that is more disadvantageous to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" may be referred to as a fall. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the 17th replay 05 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and the number 18 is displayed. When the symbol combination that becomes the corresponding re-game 05 is stopped and displayed, "white seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the push order bell, which is the condition device of "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the pushing order most advantageous to the player, and the reels are numbered 21 to 27. The symbol combinations corresponding to "Prize 01" to "Prize 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order that is most advantageous for the player. , The symbol combinations of "winning 08" to "winning 11" corresponding to the 39th to 56th are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "bell-bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices according to this embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the present embodiment, the re-game combinations are provided from re-game-A to re-game-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and are set to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Depending on the situation, the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus" in the rightmost column, a plurality of left reels M51, middle reels M52, and right reels M53 are used according to the stop order and stop position. It is configured so that different types of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of condition devices, the condition devices with the same winning number are grouped together and are in the third column from the right, "condition device (name)". It is illustrated in the item of. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, "replay" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three types of condition devices, "01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03", are configured to be stopped and displayed. The "conditional device (name)" may simply refer to the conditional device. In addition, a condition device related to a re-game such as "re-game 01" may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device in which a game medal is paid out by winning a prize such as "winning 01" may be referred to as a small role. A condition device in which the BB starts when a stop display such as "Type 1 BB-A" is displayed may be referred to as a BB combination. In addition, if the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB combination and the small combination will be won in duplicate, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small combination will be stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, while the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination does not stop and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not displayed. Is configured to stop and display. Specifically, for example, when the condition device of the winning number 21 is "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-C", the cherry that is "Winning 12" or "Winning 13" and "Type 1 BB" Any one of "-B" and Black Seven can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 are placed on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which (see the reel arrangement of) is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. And regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol numbers 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to the above are stopped, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. In that case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Type BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the "role" item, what kind of role the "condition device (name)" plays is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order in which the stop button is pressed. Regardless, it is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the "reverse push white 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 2 is RT regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. It is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination whose state does not change is stopped and displayed. However, when the reel is pushed backward (the reels are stopped in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51), the right reel M53 The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are stopped at the operation timing located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "White Seven" is stopped and displayed on the lower row of the right reel M53, middle reel M52, and left reel M51, and it is configured so that the white sevens appear to be aligned on the lower row from the player's point of view. There is. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-B and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at "White Seven" by pushing backward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect. The "forward push black 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device related to the replay in which the replay combination in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. Stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel. By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" is placed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. Is stopped and displayed, and it is configured so that the black sevens appear to be aligned in the lower row when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-C and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim for "Black Seven" by pushing forward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect.

In addition, the "RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on (), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not shift to re-game 01, re-game 02, or re-game 03. Is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52, the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the first When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on whether or not the reel is stopped. Then, when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

Further, the "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the small winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", stop in the push order of "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), stopping in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correct answer in the order of pressing) is the maximum number of winnings. The combination of symbols that will be the "winning 01" that can win 11 game medals will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "123" and the like of "push order bell 123" indicate the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of winning sheets in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of winning sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, one reel is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress", the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players are different so that the push order is not navigated to the AT-related states such as. The state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can obtain 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of the winning 04 to the winning 07 is stopped, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a conditional device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a bell regardless of the push order. Further, the "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. 9 is won. In No. 14, three watermelons A are aligned in the middle of each reel. Further, the "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the diagonal line. For example, the prize number 66 in FIG. 9 is awarded. In No. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium-weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device in which three bells can be aligned on the effective line, and details will be described later, but the winning is done during the BB. It is a condition device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by doing so. Further, the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the left reel M51 upper stage, the middle reel M52 middle stage, and the right reel M53 upper stage. Although the details will be described later, it is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) is the winning number (19) that includes one type BB-A. Bonus winning information of 1, 1 type BB-B included winning number (20-23) bonus winning information 2, 1 type BB-C included winning number (24-27) bonus winning information 3 It is said. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19/20/24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination are set to 0 for the winning / re-game winning information. , 1-18 winning / re-game winning information is distributed to each condition device for the winning number including the re-game combination or the small combination. By storing the winning / re-game winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store the information relating to which re-game combination or small combination is won. The details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "effect group number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the production group number will be described later.

Next, in the item of "ball output group number", numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the ball ejection group number, and the stored ball ejection group number is used when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT addition lottery) to execute a lottery process related to AT. It is possible to reduce the program and data capacity for this. Even if the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if the condition device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. Further, even when the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery may be executed, and in such a configuration, the payout group number is set. When the condition device to be 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, it is preferable to configure so that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning combinations) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the present embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing (also called a winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1" and "RT2" when the BB is not operating will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (particularly, the replaying combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the "replaying combination" (the total appearance of all the replaying combination) appears. The rate) is higher in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "re-game 04" (so-called fall re-game combination, "RT1", and a symbol corresponding to the re-game combination in a situation where the bonus is not won, which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6. When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" thereafter) is mainly won in "RT1", and almost never appears in "RT0". In "RT2", "re-game 04" that can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. When "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it shifts to "RT0", that is, it is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40). (Displayed as "Sorry") is executed, and when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed even though the "re-game 04" was stopped and displayed. You can improve your sex. In addition, in such a configuration, the sound effect output by the stop display of "re-game 04" and the re-game combination other than "re-game 04" (for example, "re-game" in which the RT state does not shift). The sound effect output when "01") is stopped and displayed may be different from the sound effect, and the player recognizes that "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed by such a configuration. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state" and may be referred to as non-AT gaming state) and states related to AT in which push order navigation can occur (for example, "" It may stay in "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress" and sometimes referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when the winning number that may shift (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in the non-AT game state is played. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. As a result, it is possible to shift the gaming state without letting the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). As a result, the player can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, being careful not to let the RT state fall. In addition, "re-game 05" that can be stopped and displayed with winning number 2 or 3 (re-game role that can notify that the lottery has been won by adding AT when stopped and displayed in the AT state) is mainly "RT1". It appears in, and almost never appears in other RT states. It should be noted that the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that serves as the replaying combination will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the player of the reel stop order, which is most advantageous to the player, can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. .. There is no problem even if the lottery probability is changed as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured so that it can overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which the bonus and the small winning combination overlap.

Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the BB roles of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (single roles that do not overlap with the small roles). If a BB role is won, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB), the new winning of the BB role is invalid, and only the winning of the small role is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carrying over) the 1st class BB-A, the winning number 24 "1st class BB-C" is won. , Class 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 0 "loss" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not operating, the small winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are If the overlapping conditional devices are won, the new winning of the BB combination is invalid, and only the winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carrying over) the 1st class BB-A, the winning number 21 "1st class BB-B + winning C" is won. The type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 14 "winning-C" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. The overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small role, and may overlap with a part of the replay role. For example, a part of the re-game combination of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying role in which the RT state can be transitioned), the bonus is also won when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so it is possible to give the player expectations. In the case of such a configuration, the RT state is controlled so as not to shift even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have shifted the RT state (shifted to the RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), but the replay probability is not low (frequently won the replay), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning the bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" at the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, while the BB is in operation, the winning number 13 "common bell", the winning number 17 "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)", and the winning number 18 "BB medium strong rare small role" (V-shaped bell alignment) "is configured so that three small roles can be won, and while the BB won in" AT in progress "is operating," BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment) " Alternatively, if the player wins the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)", the AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

Further, in the upper part of the figure, the appearance rate of small wins when the set value is 1 is illustrated, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (6 steps in this example). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. With this configuration, for example, when a player advances a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning times) of a common bell, the common bell is frequently won, thereby relating to the gaming machine being played. The game can be advanced with the expectation that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery, and the high-probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as the lottery related to AT).

In addition, the middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when there is push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as "AT in progress state", the reel is stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small wins, also called the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game ( This is the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of medals to be inserted when playing with a 3-card bet. The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). The average number of payouts per game is "total number of replays (total number of replays 1 to 6) x number of replays (3) + small wins (11). Sum of the number of placements (small combination appearance rate) of the combination (total number of placements for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts (11 sheets) in the small combination (11-card combination) / total number of all placements (65536) ) ”Can be calculated. Further, the expected value of increase / decrease in medals per game can be calculated as "average number of medals paid out per game / number of medals inserted per game (3 cards)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted when playing one game) is three, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, medals are expected to increase or decrease per game. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game of "RT1" is relatively large. The figures in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game is advanced in the situation where the push order navigation occurs (it is also referred to as the case where the operation is performed in the optimum operation mode or the case where the operation is performed in the advantageous operation mode), the number of medals increases in "RT1". Although not shown in "RT0" and "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is less than 1 under the condition that the push order navigation does not occur, and the medal. Will decrease. In addition, in this embodiment, even in "RT0" or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is larger than 1 when there is push order navigation, but the expected value is not limited to 1, and "RT0" is not limited to this. Or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game when there is push order navigation may be smaller than 1. In addition, when the symbol combination to be the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but in calculating the expected value of medal increase / decrease in this embodiment, medals are used. It is calculated on the assumption that 3 medals are paid out. In addition, one game may be referred to as one game.

In addition, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0" and 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. In the case of "RT2", it is 3.67137146. Further, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0" and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. Is 1.223790487 when is "RT2", and when there is push order navigation, the RT state is "RT1", which is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small wins and replays are just examples. For example, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in "RT2" where BB is being established internally (when there is push order navigation). The expected value of increase / decrease in medals) may be configured to be less than 1. With such a configuration, in the situation where push order navigation occurs and in the case of "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), when the bonus is not aligned in the game where the bonus can be aligned. However, the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and in the situation where push order navigation occurs and when it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), it is intentional in a game where bonuses can be arranged. It is possible to prevent a strategy that increases the number of medals held by not arranging bonuses.

Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, the electrical schematic configuration of the rotating cylinder type game machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the revolving game machine according to the present embodiment, the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is centered, and the sub-control board S, the door board D, the revolving board K, the power supply board E, the relay board IN, The setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected so as to be able to exchange data. The solid line part in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line part in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game unit) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed by the rotating cylinder type game machine P. The main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the CPUC100, the built-in ROMC110, the built-in RAMC120, and the like are connected to the main control chip C so as to be able to exchange data with each other by a bus. Then, the main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub control board S, the door board D, and the rotating cylinder board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K or the like {for example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) is output toward the sub-control board S. By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S can execute push-order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board SC (sometimes referred to as a sub-control means, a sub-board, a sub-control means, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S is also mounted with the sub-control chip SC as in the above-mentioned main control board M. The sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured to be connected by a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. Further, various LED lamps S10, speakers S20, effect display device S40, rotating cylinder backlight (also referred to as back lamp) S30 and the like are connected to the sub-control board S. Here, the rotating cylinder backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotating cylinder backlight S30, and the like. We are directing.

On the door substrate D, the above-mentioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and the start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. Lever D50, settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game {not shown, but described above. The input number indicator D210, the operation status indicator D180, the special game status indicator D250, the payout number indicator (push order indicator) D270 is a display device such as a credit number indicator D200, an advantageous section indicator YH, etc. , A door switch D80 for determining the opening / closing of the front door, canceling an error, and changing the set value, and a game medal (or other foreign matter) that is judged to be incompatible after being inserted. A blocker D100 or the like for refunding to D240 is connected. Further, the door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so as to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, the signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, a rotating cylinder motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating cylinder sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating cylinder substrate K. The reel M50 can be stopped at a determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotation position of the reel M50 by the reel sensor K20. There is. Further, in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine of the present embodiment, a so-called step motor (stepping motor) is used for the rotating cylinder motor K10. In the step motor, 504 steps are set as the number of steps for the reel M50 to rotate once. Further, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is set with a predetermined number (for example, 20) symbols having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. Is set to 24 steps (= 20/480). There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel lap are changed.

Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on the control signal from the main control board M. Perform the operation to put out. The medal payout device H is provided with a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s, and a disk H50, which determine whether or not the medals are normally paid out and measure the number of game medals paid out. A hopper motor H80 for rotating is connected to the hopper motor H80.

These various control boards and the electric power consumed by the boards are supplied from the power supply board E (the board that controls the presence / absence of power supply by the power supply switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a broken line arrow. As shown in the drawing, electric power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotating cylinder board K, relay board IN) are supplied with electric power. Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and after converting this power into a DC voltage of a specified voltage, it is supplied to each control board and board.

Further, on the main control board M, a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process (for changing the setting), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error, etc. Button M30, is connected. Further, the main control board M is a state related to a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) and AT which is advantageous for the player. AT lottery means to execute AT transition lottery to shift to, and AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT in progress state". It has an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 31 are flowcharts showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown in rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown in rectangles), judgments (shown in diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. ing. Further, when the details of the processing steps are illustrated by another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is illustrated as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the development stage of the game machine, the game machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, the subroutine (which is executed by the game machine with different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. It is configured so as not to leave subroutines that are not normally used), and prevents processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or cheating.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing that is executed for the first time on the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the rotating cylinder type game machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). .. First, in step 1000, after the power of the rotating drum type game machine P is turned on, in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is not started but the timer is started). Only the type of interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method setting) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, the power is turned off and the power is turned off and restored based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area. (Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held) and generates power-off / recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). (Check result of) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1018. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process when the power is turned off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the power-off processing according to the returned stack pointer.

If No in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the backup error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, it will be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). Set to). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step 1904). (Check result in 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a range excluding the area in which at least the set value is stored in the RAM (for example, in the register area). To), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range not included in the RAM initialization range is not limited to the area where the set value is stored, and the total number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total number of games in the game section (advantageous section + normal section). , As a result of calculating the stay ratio of the "advantageous section", etc. are also in the range not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With this configuration, the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio) can be calculated and displayed. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the game machine is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at 5 second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio-> continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games-> cumulative bonus ratio-> cumulative continuous bonus ratio-> cumulative bonus ratio". Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is "the number of payouts when the RB is operating / the total number of payouts", and the bonus ratio is the "number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating". / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to all the ranges in the RAM (for example, sets it in the register area), and then steps. Move to 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which a special game is executed. (To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed immediately after the start of the program processing due to noise or cheating). Further, although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure so as to store only the information related to the random number (do not store other information such as various timer values) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise or the like. To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value is managed by 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return it to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value as 0 to 5, the correction process of the set value (the process of step 1106 and step 1108) after the initialization of the RAM is executed is unnecessary. This makes it possible to shorten the processing time and reduce the processing capacity. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the most disadvantageous value for the player) in the set value, and proceeds to step 1110. On the other hand, even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M indicates to the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, “88” for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the set value held in the RAM), and the process proceeds to step 1112. As described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure has occurred in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be turned on) and the push order is notified, incorrect information can be notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout number display device D270 fully illuminate "88" of the 7-segment while the setting change device is operating, it can be confirmed whether or not the 7-segment is out of order, which is not suitable for the player. It is possible to prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value, the storage area of the RAM for displaying the set value for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value in the storage area for storing the set value is provided, and the storage area is referred to. It may be configured to display the set value. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, in step 1112, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (if the set value exceeds 5 as a result of the addition, the set value becomes 0). , Step 1116. In addition, even if No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processes of steps 1112 to 1116 are looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays an error display LED (not shown) indicating that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and displays the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is terminated is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in another flowchart) in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUC100 of the main control board M disables interrupts (after that, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to the various LEDs and the drive output to the various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process is concerned. Is repeated, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, it enters an infinite loop, so it does not accept any operation that prompts it to return). If No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes of steps 1306 to 1310 are processes for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, the hall computer side can provide information on the error and the game progress status when the error occurs. It is possible to output to).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, valid lines for winning, etc.). In step 1203, the data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, the condition device number (winning number), the effect group number, the instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address) The process of setting the data) in the RAM is also included. It should be noted that the condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, and the like may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 25). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. Further, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set in step 1704. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state") (in step 1416, step 1428, step 1438, step 1444 of FIG. 20). Set the state related to the determined AT). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state related to AT may be executed in step 1416, step 1428, step 1438, and step 1444 of FIG. Further, when transmitting the state related to AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit, and the state related to AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the "advantageous section". Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, an “advantageous section”) in the game (the game section determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 29). set). Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a sub tank (not shown) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and a determination is made based on the continuity / non-conduction of current by a plurality of fullness detection sensors provided in the sub tank (via medals). When the current is conducted, it is judged to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on. ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the display of the error number corresponding to the medal full error with the 7-segment LED (for example, the storage display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been cleared (for example, whether or not the current from the sub tank is non-conducting and the setting / reset button M30 is pressed). To do. In the case of Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and then steps. Move to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replaying role), and the next process (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process for forming the medal flow path). Specifically, when the re-game combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current number of stored cards (credits) is less than the predetermined value (50 cards in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if the re-game combination is established, if the number of stored cards (credits) does not reach the predetermined value, the game medal can be inserted, such as "RT1". When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the winning probability of the re-game role is higher than that of the RT state, or when the re-game role is difficult to understand by appearance (re-game pretending to be a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped on the invalid line, the player can play the game with good rhythm (without discomfort).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game medal has not been bet and the credit does not exist. In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, does the CPUC100 of the main control board M satisfy the setting display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, and the input number indicator light D210). The value is displayed (the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode), and the step 1221 proceeds on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the process for sending a command indicating to start the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and the setting change mode when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied. Is executing a process to send a command indicating that it will end. If No in step 1220 or 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, the insertion of medals). It has two throw-in sensors for detection, and when the first throw-in sensor D20s or the second throw-in sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been accepted). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (first input sensor D20s or second input sensor D20s or second input). When the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, it is determined that the CPUC100 of the main control board M has accepted the insertion of one normal game medal. Although not shown, after step 1231, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a maximum number of credits (50 in this example) and a maximum number of bets (3 in this example). If it is determined to be Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which the medal flow path is not formed). If No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the remaining number of credits or the bet game medal exists. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when driving the hopper motor H80), and the game is played. Pay out one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the present embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a re-game, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). .. Specifically, did the situation in which it was determined that the medals were not paid out continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal was transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been cleared (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If No in step 1241 or 1247, the process proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if No in step 1232 or step 1233, the start lever D50 is effective for the CPUC100 of the main control board M in step 1251 (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted, etc.). ), And it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process of acquiring a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. If No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the conditional device number management process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state in which the AT can be added to the lottery. Here, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery according to the present embodiment are "AT in progress state", "additional specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous for the player if the player does not dare to align the symbol combinations of the BB in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". In addition, it may be configured so that the AT addition lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal middle game", and in such a configuration, the AT addition lottery is won in the "advantageous BB internal middle game". It may be configured to notify the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added, without notifying immediately. In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game number addition execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, even if No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1550. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). Execute a lottery) is preferable.

Here, the states related to AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 28). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired), and the bonus combination has not been won. (2) The "normal BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB combination is won in the "low probability state" and the BB combination is not won. (3) The "normal BB state" corresponds to the BB combination when the BB combination is won in the "low probability state" and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed, or in the "normal BB internal medium game". This is the state to be executed when the symbol combination to be performed is stopped and displayed. (4) The "high probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired) and the bonus combination has not been won. It is a state in which it is easier to win an AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". (5) The "AT in progress state" is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. (6) The "specialization precursor state" is a state in which the right to shift to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than the "AT in progress state", has been acquired. .. (7) The "additional specialization state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state". (8) "Advantageous BB internal medium game" means that the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state of not winning a prize. (9) The "advantageous BB state" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB role by winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state". It is a state to be executed when the stop display is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the reel rotation start preparation process described later. Next, in step 1260, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts rotating all reels. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is requested to create a pull-in point creation request (rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53, and is requested to determine the stop position, and the stop order is It is determined whether or not there is (as required as appropriate depending on the stop position of other reels). In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1261-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not it is a “BB internal middle game”. Here, "BB internal medium game" is a general term for "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game", and is in a state where the BB role is won and the BB has not won a prize. .. If Yes in step 1261-2, the process proceeds to step 1262. On the other hand, if No in step 1261-2, in step 1261-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell (winning-A1 to winning-A6). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1261-3, in step 1261-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point that is the maximum number of payouts (11 in this example), and proceeds to step 1263. If No in step 1261-3, the process proceeds to step 1262. Next, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, even if No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal reeling game", in the game in which the push order bell was won, the stop buttons were not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (when the reel is stopped in the order of pressing the wrong answer), 11 symbol combinations will be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win a prize. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance / rejection check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the stopped button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). , Step 1266. On the other hand, even if No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes all reel stop check processing. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoptable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined to be). If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area) in step 1270. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning a prize. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there has been a prize for paying out the game medal {the game medal obtained by the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If this is the case, the game medal will be paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (the flag that is turned on when driving the hopper motor H80) and executes the payout of one game medal. .. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). .. In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been cleared (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps 1282. Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the prize (the prize that became Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT in-state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, transition process of the game state, etc.), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing the internal lottery in which the winning number and the number of places to be compared with the acquired random numbers are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It should be noted that the winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small winning combination are won in duplicate, or if the bonus and the replaying role are won in duplicate, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are obtained from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same set number for comparison with the acquired random number, and is stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the same number is used for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 which are push order replaying roles. Since the number of consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which is the push order bell role, is the same, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay combination is 3, and the push order bell is used. The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. It should be noted that the lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 which are the push order replaying roles are acquired and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the pushing order bell roles are acquired are as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400) without executing the determination (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of iterations. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processes of steps 361 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number), and proceeds to step 3604 to move to step 3604. Subsequent processing is executed. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the state related to the AT capable of executing the AT lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the state related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery is only the "high probability state", and by winning the BB in the "high probability state", the "advantageous BB internal medium game". After that, when the BB combination wins a prize, it shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the "AT in progress state", and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. The value of 50 times will be set. Even if the player wins the BB in the "low probability state", the game shifts to the "normal BB internal medium game" and does not shift to the "AT in progress state" thereafter. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the BB is won in the "normal game state", the AT lottery may be won with the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the BB is changed. By aligning them, it will shift to the "advantageous BB state". In the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the BBs are not aligned, the game section may be set as the "advantageous section" or the "standby section". In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (BB combination in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "advantageous BB internal middle game", and proceeds to step 1408. Further, even if No in step 1402 or 1404, the process proceeds to step 1408. In this embodiment, when the AT-related states are different, the AT winning rate (whether or not the AT can be won) related to the AT lottery is different, but when the AT-related states are the same. The AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same even if the set value is different (if the BB is won in the "high probability state", the AT is always won regardless of the set value = then " Shift to "AT in progress").

Next, in step 1408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1408, in step 1410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a small condition device related to the game that can shift from a “low probability state” to a “high probability state” by winning. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a cherry). In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem even if it is changed). Execute a high-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high-probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

If No in step 1408, in step 1418, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a role in which the condition device related to the game can shift from a “high probability state” to a “low probability state” by winning. In this example, it is determined whether or not the game is replay-A). In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUC100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/5, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem in changing it). Execute a low-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1424, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed low-probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is the "high probability state", the game section is the "advantageous section", and when the game section is the "advantageous section", the push order It is configured so that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the navigation is executed one or more times or the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) "advantageous section" continues. Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the "high-probability state" is configured so that the "high-probability state" does not end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been executed more than once. ). In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT in the next game and thereafter to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. In addition, even if No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1420, step 1424 or step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1430. It should be noted that such a lottery method is just an example. For example, the low probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the "high probability state" (the stay in the "high probability state" is guaranteed. ), A lottery for shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the lapse of the 10 games. The AT lottery combination (low probability AT lottery combination, high probability AT lottery combination) and state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

Next, in step 1430, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (11 in this example). Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", the AT counter value is 11 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 11 games or more, watermelon B With a 1/2 chance of winning the game, you can get the right to move to the "additional specialization state" and move to the "specialization precursor state", while the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". , AT counter value is 10 or less, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 10 games or less, a lottery (specialization) to acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" even if the watermelon B is won. The state transition lottery) is not executed, and the transition to the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state" is not performed. The lottery is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 10 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" (also known as the specialized state transition lottery) It may be configured to be able to execute (sometimes referred to as), and in a situation where the AT counter value is 10 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" is given. If the lottery to be won is won, it may be configured so that the next game that wins the lottery can be (shifted to) a "specialized precursor state" or an "additional specialized state", or the AT counter value. May be configured to be (or transition to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" when becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or the game won in the lottery. After executing a predetermined number of games, it may be configured so that it can (or shift to) a “specialization precursor state” or an “additional specialization state”. In addition, when shifting to the "additional specialization state", it is not always necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state". For example, the configuration is such that the transition from the "AT in progress state" to the "additional specialization state" can be performed directly. You may. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can execute a lottery in which the conditional device related to the game can execute a lottery to acquire the transfer right to the specialization transition combination (“additional specialization state””. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1434, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1436, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to the “specialization precursor state”, and proceeds to step 1440. In addition, even if No in step 1430, step 1431, step 1432 or step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1440.

Next, in step 1440, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1440, in step 1442, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the transition condition of the state related to AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 28, “specialization precursor”. Satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursor games, are exhausted in "State"). In the case of Yes in step 1442, in step 1444, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game (for example, as shown in FIG. 28, a precursor in the “specialized precursor state”. When the number of games is exhausted, it is determined to be in the "additional specialized state"), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1450). Even if No in step 1440, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1450).

In this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", the AT transition lottery is not won (then "AT in progress state"). On the other hand, if the BB role is won in the "high probability state", the AT transition lottery will be won (then the transition to the "AT in progress state"), but this is not limited to this. , When the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery and is configured to have "high probability state A" and "high probability state B" as states related to AT which is an "advantageous section", "high". If the condition device A is won in the "probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and if the condition device A is won in the "high probability state B", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/2. May be configured to win. In addition, when the AT transition lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT preparation state" which is the preparation state until the transition to the "AT in progress state" as the state related to the AT, and then the predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation"). It may be configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" when 10 games have passed since the shift to the "state".

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replay winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, winning / replay winning related to the game). Set the command related to information). Next, in step 1454, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is a combination with a push order (a condition device in which the winning combination differs depending on the push order, for example, winning-A1 or the like). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a push order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and gives an instruction. It is stored in the RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. It should be noted that the instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number becomes the initial value based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. When executing the push order guessing game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game. Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. .. In this example, displaying the reel stop order that is most profitable to the player on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as a push order navigation, a push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed by the push order display device D270 as "= 1". In both the push order bell and the push order replay, it is configured to be displayed as "= 1". In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of displaying the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" on the push order display device D270 in the game related to the push order bell, and in the game related to the push order replay The display mode may be different from the case where the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the push order navigation display mode displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

If No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes mask processing on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and the masked information is used as the predetermined address of the RAM. Remember in. Here, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information is recognized by an illegal act, it is considered as a high profit related to the game. The push order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing mask processing {processing for keeping the winning / replay winning information (particularly information related to the pressing order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game. By configuring it to send to, it is configured so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As the mask processing method in the present embodiment, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (winning / replay winning information having a similar role is preferable, and for example, the RT state shifts depending on the pushing order. A plurality of winning / re-gaming winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a symbol combination that serves as a re-gaming role is used as one production group number (for example, winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 are designated as production group 4). The group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the provided winning / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replay after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. Also, even in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information among the existing winning / replay winning information such as the production group number is used as one winning / replay winning information for winning / replaying after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the game winning information to be provided (for example, the winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 is the winning / re-gaming winning information 19 (newly provided winning) which is the winning / re-gaming winning information after mask processing.・ Re-game winning information), etc.). If it is determined that the game is to notify the operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to AT on the main control board M, the winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing, and then steps. Move to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus is won can be recognized by the sub side) (for example,). (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1259). In the present embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, and the derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as a display example of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT in progress", (1) when the fall replay combination is included → the fall replay combination is not stopped and displayed. The order is navigating, (2) in the case of bells (1 piece combination, 11 piece combination) → the push order with the largest number of payouts is navigating, and so on. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game section is the "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) is displayed on the sub-control board S side. (A number that can specify) and an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous push order for the player), while the sub-control board S is configured when the game section is a "normal section". It is configured so that the production group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game, including the winning / replay winning information in which the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order, is directly used on the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order. In the case of winning information, the effect group number in which the information related to the pressing order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

When the game section is not an "advantageous section", mask processing is executed when the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub-control board S to determine the effect group number. Then, the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the production group number is the winning / re-game winning information, and the winning / re-game winning information related to the winning role (for example, the re-game role including the fall re-game role, the push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and numbers are assigned. It is configured to execute mask processing {process to keep the winning / replay winning information (especially the information related to the pressing order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game and then transmit it to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which the information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order) that is highly profitable related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number related to the game as an additional AT game (in the "AT in progress state", a winning number capable of adding the remaining number of AT games). In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the re-game-B, the re-game-C, and the winning-D). If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game added to the BB. In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether or not it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). To judge. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can add the number of remaining AT games to the specializing middle addition group number for the game. In the "AT in progress state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, replay-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6). (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 2, 13). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning game number lottery table, and determines the number of AT additional games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random number value falls within the range). It should be noted that determining the number of AT-added games is also referred to as executing an AT-added lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined number of AT-added games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S receives the command. It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. It should be noted that the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be executed even in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are the payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus. ..

Here, the lottery table shown in the margin of the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games at the time of winning, and in the present embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, " If the additional winning combination is won at the time of winning in "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB state"), based on the payout group number related to the game, The number of AT additional games is determined by lottery from "0" to "300", and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. If "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as non-winning in the AT additional lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when the additional combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure, and as a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In the case, {number of games (600) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of games (100) x number of AT additional games (10) + number of games (300) x number of AT additional games (30) + number of games ( 24) × number of AT additional games (100)} / total number of placements (1024) = 12.1 (games).

Next, when the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {number of placements (500) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (200) x number of AT additional games (50) + Calculated as number of units (300) x number of AT additional games (100) + number of units (24) x number of AT additional games (300)} / total number of units (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, {number of games (300) x number of AT additional games (10) + number of games (600) x It can be calculated as the number of AT additional games (30) + the number of placements (124) × the number of AT additional games (50)} / the total number of placements (1024) = 26.61 (games). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is "addition specialized state". It has become.

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare role, {number of placements (800) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (100) ) × Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (100)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-strong rare role, {number of placements (300) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements (400) ) × Number of AT additional games (50) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (300)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 35.4 (Games).

In the present embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT addition games may differ depending on the type of winning combination, but the number of AT addition games may differ depending on the set value. The average values are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 execute the same processing as the AT addition lottery, the winning number is 7. It is necessary to execute the process of determining whether or not the number is 8, but the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured to execute the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number as in the present embodiment. When the same process is executed as the AT additional lottery, the process related to the AT additional lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 should be executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. Will be possible.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine by the winning number (or winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Is a winning number for re-game-B (reverse-push white 7 replay, which is a re-game in which White Seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-B, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the regame-B. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and reverse push (“right → middle → left”). Will be executed to instruct the white sevens to be aligned), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, if No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the reverse push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the white sevens on the invalid line) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. In addition, even if No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game as the replay-C (or the payout group number). It is determined whether or not it is a replay (forward push black 7 replay) in which the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by the forward push. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-C, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the regame-C. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and forward push (“left → middle → right”). (The effect of instructing the black sevens to be aligned) is set in, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). On the other hand, if No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the forward push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the forward push (“left → middle → right”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the black sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550). In the present embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands to subordinate. It is configured so that the control board S side can execute the effect related to the push order navigation, but it is not limited to this, and when the AT additional lottery is won, it is related to the fact that the AT additional lottery is won and the number of AT additional games. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT-added games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the push order navigation is performed on the sub-control board S side. It may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to. As an example, in a game in which the re-game-B is won and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), a production mode in which a reverse push is instructed is selected. It may be configured to be executed, or in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined condition (for example, a specific replay combination (for example, replay)) is executed. In a game in which (game-B or C) has been won), an effect of instructing a push order in which 7 alignments are possible on an invalid line may be executed. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed at the same time, in that case, the final game of the continuous effect) is satisfied, the number of AT games is added to the effect (displayed by the effect display device S40). It is an effect that the display related to the number of remaining AT games is increased. For example, (displayed as "+ 30G") may be executed. In this example, the effect display device S40 also increases the number of remaining AT games. It is configured so that such a display can be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. Note that the replay-game- In a game in which B is a winning game and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the predetermined conditions thereafter are satisfied. As an example of executing the effect of adding the number of AT games in the game that has been played, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that encourages the winning of the bonus is being executed on the sub-control board S side (inside the bonus). Then, since the winning probability of re-game-B is low (including 0%), if the push order in which 7 matches are possible is notified, the player will recognize that the bonus has not been won), etc. There is a case where the board S side is executing a special effect. In addition, the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the number of remaining AT games has been added. The information includes (1) the number of AT remaining games transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side after the lottery with the AT added. After that, the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time on the sub control board S side. Calculate the difference between the information about the game and the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasp the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery. (2) Obtained as a result of the AT additional game on the main control board M side. A command regarding the number of AT additional games has been transmitted to the sub-control board S side. If the AT additional lottery is not won, a command relating to the fact that the AT additional lottery is not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. When the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the production mode of the effect related to the push order navigation. As an example, the replay-B may be used. It ’s a winning game Then, in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games is not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the pressing order avoids 7 sets). It may be configured to select and execute the effect mode for instructing. The lottery for adding AT was executed on the main control board M side, but the information on the sub control board S side determining that the number of remaining AT games was not added is as follows: (1) Information on the number of remaining AT games. After the AT addition lottery, transmission is performed from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, on the sub-control board S side, the difference between the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time and the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery is grasped. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time from the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is 1, it is judged that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command regarding the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer to measure. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts by newly setting the minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the pushing order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an output request during reel rotation start standby related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game. In other words, the processes of steps 1562 and 1564 make it possible to transmit a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reel starts rotating. Next, in step 1566, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state stored in the RAM area from the reel stop state to the reel rotation start standby state, and moves to the next process (process of step 1260). Transition.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the game sections, and the game situation which is advantageous for the player such as when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". It is a game section that is easy to set in. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is initially set to 1500, which is the subtraction counter and the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section". The counter value of (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game during the "advantageous interval") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is "AT in progress". In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). Even if No in step 3402 or step 3408, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the "AT in progress state", the AT counter value for each game is subtracted, but the "advantageous BB state" and " In the case of "advantageous BB internal medium game", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. That is, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the state shifts from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is maintained while maintaining the AT counter value. It is configured so that it can transition (transition) from "state"-> "specialization precursor state"-> "additional specialization state". Even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible not to subtract 1 from the AT counter value when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. You may control it. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". Is stored, or "30 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, is stored, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α" which is the sum of the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery is , Without notifying in the game, "α" is set in a specific game after the game (a game that satisfies a predetermined condition at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game). You may notify). Then, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and an effect suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It can be configured so that the number of remaining AT games is subtracted for each game. With this configuration, when a bonus is won in a state where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning. That is, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, the continuous effect over a plurality of games that incites whether or not the bonus is won can be executed by using the effect display device S40 or the like to enhance the interest of the game. The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is "30", or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of winning and adding as a result of the AT addition lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, continuous production over multiple games is executed to incite whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is "1". , The winning number (or winning / re-game winning information, or ball output group number) in which the game can be executed and the AT addition lottery can be executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". If the player wins and does not win the AT additional lottery, the number of AT games becomes "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes "0". Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transitionable conditions are the execution of RAM clear (initialization of RWM), the stop display of the re-game (in this example, the stop display of the re-game 04), and the winning / starting of the BB. -It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state can be shifted and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT shiftable condition, and the next process (step 1750). Process). In addition, even if No in step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1750). In the present embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped, but when shifting to "RT1", the shift timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for shifting the RT state (memorizing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined.

Next, FIG. 26 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and the RT states are satisfied by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. Will be migrated. As a specific example of transition to the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RWM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the transition to "RT0" is performed. The stop display of the re-game 04 is specifically when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1". , Re-games 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. , The RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

In addition, when the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the winning game (the condition device related to the first type BB-A to C operates). The RT state shifts to "RT2". In addition, when the BB role is won in "RT2" (class 1 BB-A to C operate), the process shifts to "class 1 BB-A, B, C". Further, when the BB ends at "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (the operation of Type 1 BB-A to C ends), the process shifts to "RT1". In addition, when the state related to AT is "low probability state", the BB is won, and when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to "RT1" which is highly profitable for the player. Since the push order navigation does not occur in the state, when the "re-game-D1 to D3" is won, the wrong push order (the first stop is the left button, the middle button, and the right button). One of the three choices is the correct push order and the re-games other than the re-game 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are the incorrect push order and the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping, the re-game 04 will be stopped and displayed, and the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" will occur. In addition, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the BB is won, and if the BB ends, the RT state is reached. Will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to AT is a state in which push order navigation occurs, and even when "Re-game-D1 to D3" is won, re-game 04 Will navigate the correct push order that does not stop and display, so "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. The AT state transitionable condition is, for example, a condition that is satisfied when the winning BB in the "high probability state" ends and shifts to the "AT in progress state" from the next game (see FIG. 28). .. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1760, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly shifts to the "AT precursor state", and the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, and "AT in progress" The number of games for which subtraction is started after shifting to the "state") is set in the AT counter M60, and the next process (process in step 3500) is started. Even if No in step 1752, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the game shifts to the "advantageous BB state" by winning the BB, and the AT game is in the "advantageous BB state". When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and the "advantageous BB state" shifts to the "AT in progress state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, when the player is informed that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 at the start of the "AT in progress state". It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, instead of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is set at the start of the "AT in progress state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT in progress state" or in a state where the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for producing a notification is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional production that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur).

Next, FIG. 28 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state" , "Advantageous BB internal game", and "Advantageous BB state", there are nine AT-related states, and the AT-related state shifts when the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure are satisfied. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the "AT in progress state" and the special state transition lottery that wins in 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". In addition, when 10 games have passed (digested) after shifting to the "specialized precursor state", the game is configured to shift to the "additional specialized state". As the game section, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "normal BB internal game", and "normal BB state" are set to "normal section", and "high probability state" and "during AT". The six AT-related states of "state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "advantageous BB state" are set in the "advantageous section". That is, even if the states related to the six ATs that are the "advantageous section" are transitioned (shifted), the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated when 1500 games have passed without setting the "normal section". It is set to "normal section". In addition, when the push order navigation is displayed in the notification game state of "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. However, the game state is maintained.

The state related to AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or a "high probability state", and the AT lottery is performed. By winning the game, the player may be configured to shift to the "precursor state" and shift to the "AT in progress state" after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition device may be used. By winning, the AT lottery is executed, and if the AT lottery is not won, it shifts to the "precursor state" and shifts to the "low probability state" or "high probability state" after 16 to 32 games have passed. It may be configured to do so. Further, a "waiting section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as the game section. For example, when the game property is such that the AT lottery is executed by winning the "cherry", BB If you win the "BB + cherry" where the cherry and the cherry overlap, and you win the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of the "BB + cherry" wins is configured as the "waiting section". You may. In this way, by providing the "waiting section", the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and the BB is won and the AT is won in the "low probability state". Since the advantageous section indicator YH is off during the period until the BB symbol combinations are complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up) when the lottery is won, the AT lottery is won. It is possible to incite the player whether or not it is. Further, when the BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB, and in such a configuration, during the BB Execute an AT additional lottery different from the BB won in the "AT in progress state" as the BB won in the "addition specialized state" (for example, win the AT additional lottery than the BB won in the "AT in progress state" It may be configured so that it is easy to add, and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, if the BB is elected in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB, and in such a configuration, during the BB The AT addition lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "additional specialization state".

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section is a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player and relatively high for the player. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section" which is a profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an "advantageous section", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 0 in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. Whether or not, in other words, whether or not the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to AT (thus, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of staying games in the "specialized precursor state" is described. Things will also be 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the "advantageous section" other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. This is the case when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "advantageous section" is completed and the "normal section" is set after the next game, the information related to AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) Since all the information related to) is cleared, the conditions for becoming the "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. Information related to the AT to be cleared by the process of step 3515 (process at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 and a flag indicating the game state. In addition, this information will also be cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed, but depending on the RAM clear when the setting is changed, "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , "The number of stored sheets" and the like are also cleared, but depending on the process of step 3515 (process at the end of the advantageous section), "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , Information related to "number of stored sheets" etc. is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range when the setting is changed and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, when the process of step 3515 is executed) are different. It should be noted that the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, so that the "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state" may be held. In addition, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. By making the addresses of the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the range of the start address to be cleared and the range of the addresses to be cleared at the time of the clearing process. Further, when the "advantageous section" is completed, a command relating to the end of the "advantageous section" is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and the information related to how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed is not deleted. ing. However, when the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" on the sub-control board S side and information on how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed. Will also be erased.

When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0, (1) when the current state related to AT is the "high probability state". In the next game, the state related to AT becomes "low probability state". (2) If the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the state related to AT becomes "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game. "Normal BB internal game", (3) If the current state related to AT is "Advantageous BB state", the state related to AT will be "Normal BB state" in the next game, (4) Currently If the AT-related state of is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", the state related to AT is configured to be "low probability state" in the next game. (Because the information related to AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” is completed, and proceeds to step 3528. It is configured to turn off the advantageous section indicator YH when the "advantageous section" ends and is set to the "normal section", but the detailed turn-off timing is not limited to the timing of the present embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal is inserted for a game in which the “advantageous section” ends and becomes the “normal section”. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off before the start lever D50 that enables the start of the next game is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, it was decided that the CPUC100 of the main control board M was newly set to the "advantageous section" in the next game (it was decided to set the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) common to all the set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights up the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1293). Even if No in step 3528, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). In the present embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. The timing will be described later in FIG.

Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (T is set in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example). It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking the input port of a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a power-off processing described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power failure detection signal, the on reception sensor D10s, and the first on sensor. Information related to detection of the D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of operation and the sensor detection state of these operating members are sampled at the interrupt interval T. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously turned on for multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. It can also be detected that Next, in step 1611, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a rotating cylinder drive control process (process related to control of driving the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53). .. Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. In addition, even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, all the error flags are turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number number error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, and the door switch flag are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (an error currently occurring) corresponding to the turned-on error flag is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes as in the second error (for example, payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (send the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), Command related to production group number (Sent immediately after operation of start lever D50), Command related to winning / re-game winning information (Sent immediately after all reels are stopped) Commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), commands related to RT status (sent immediately after starting lever operation (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to RT status (next game after all reels are stopped) (Sent before the start of), commands related to the state related to AT (sent between the time all reels are stopped and the next game is started), commands related to the number of remaining AT games (Sent from the stop of all reels to the start of the next game, or immediately after the start lever operation), forward push instruction command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), forward push avoidance command There are a reverse push instruction command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), a reverse push avoidance command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), and the like. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the rotating drum type game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error, a payout error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and 7 Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of power off / off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processed flag (for example, updates the inside of the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and error detection information (for example, the calculation) based on the calculated checksum. The lower 1 byte of the checksum, or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits writing in the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for a reset.

Next, FIG. 32 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the rotating cylinder type game machine according to this example. The table on the figure shows the reel stop order and instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information related to the push order, which is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub control board S in this example). It is a table showing the correspondence with. For example, the instruction number for notifying "middle-> right-> left" as the pressing order indicates that it is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “left → middle → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A1”). The image displayed in is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display system and also serves as a payout number display device. When the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, the display on the push order display device D270 is whether the number of medals paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 should display "=" in the left digit like "= 1". By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the left side is "=" and the right side is a number as the display of the push order display device D270. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that it is a push order navigation display, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is an “advantageous section” is lit. At the same time, a display of "remaining 40 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT in progress") is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, the right side in the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). There is. In addition, since the current game section is the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, and the display of "remaining 25 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that, among the conditional devices in which the combination displayed as stopped depending on the reel stop order is different, the combination with the push order (the conditional device with the payout of medals, for example, the bell) and the replay combination with the push order (depending on the reel stop order). Among the condition devices having different stops and displays, the segment display of the instruction number of the condition device related to the re-game combination) may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an LED display may be used to light a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number to give an instruction. In addition, the advantageous section display YH may be provided at the lower right of the credit number display device D200. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he / she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to check whether any medals remain. Then, if there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, by turning on the settlement button D60 before it becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the game from being accidentally stopped even though it is an "advantageous section" from the next game. be able to.

Further, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and a section display similar to the advantageous section display YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section display is provided). (Providing two) may be configured, and in such a configuration, when the section indicator on the left side lights up, it notifies that the current game section is a "normal section", and on the other hand, on the right side. When the section display lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an "advantageous section". Furthermore, the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" are distinguished according to the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, "green" in the "normal section" and "red" in the "advantageous section". Alternatively, it may be configured to be lit in the "normal section" and "blinking" in the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is changed according to "AT in BB internal game", "AT in BB state", "AT precursor state", "AT in state", etc. in the "advantageous section". You may. Further, it may be configured so that the current gaming section can be recognized as a "standby section" by distinguishing it from a "normal section" and an "advantageous section". However, the distinction between "normal section" and "advantageous section" is made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether or not the current game section is "advantageous section". It is preferable to make it easy to do.

Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparing", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. The configuration may be such that the disadvantage to the player that the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is subtracted in a state where the profit is relatively low for the player is not notified). However, even in such a configuration, it is preferable to turn on the section indicator to notify the player that the "advantageous section" is in progress. At the same time, it is preferable that the section display is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and the section display is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44.

<Sub-program start processing>
First, FIG. 33 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of the checksum, and the like.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off match. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later in step 2010. It is determined whether or not the state has recovered from the state in which the power was cut off, that is, whether or not the state has completely recovered.

In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the command is completely restored, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows interrupts and executes the command when a power failure occurs in step 2012. 1 Return the process to command processing.

On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that the checksum values of both do not match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the RAM in step 2014. To execute. After executing the process of step 2014, or when No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 34 is a subroutine showing the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 33 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows interrupts. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command reception process. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later. This one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2250. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is returned to step 2102. The predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to the process.

<Sub-side power off processing>
Next, FIG. 35 is a subroutine showing the sub-side power cutoff process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power off processing is a process started when the sub control board S detects a power off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates the checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has passed, the power off processing is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2212 whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of momentary interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer and returns to the process executed when the power is turned off. If it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that the power supply has not been restored, the process is returned to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 36 is a subroutine showing one command process called and executed in the process of step 2250 of FIG. 33.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of Yes in step 2300, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the start lever operation time processing described later, and performs the next processing (step). 2110 processing).

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, in the case of the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the first reel stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2258 whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, in the case of the second reel stop reception reception timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the second reel stop reception reception processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2262 whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop reception reception timing, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the third reel stop reception reception processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2266 whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. .. If YES in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stop display symbol time processing (not shown), and the next The process shifts to the process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2266, in other words, when it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 37 is a subroutine showing a process during start lever operation that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is in the AT state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to AT is the AT-in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-AT process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to AT is not in the AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a special precursor state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is the special precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the special precursor process at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. It is executed and moved to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the state related to AT "additional specialization state". It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is the "additional specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the addition specialization processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "additional specialized state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the state related to AT to "advantageous BB inside". It is determined whether or not it is a "game". In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, when the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal intermediate game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a subroutine of advantageous BB internal intermediate processing when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is whether or not the RT state is "RT1". To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, when the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has no push order navigation in the state related to AT (push order navigation is It is a state related to AT that does not occur, and it is determined whether or not it is a "low probability state", "normal BB internal game", "normal BB state", etc.). In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, when the state related to AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. As described above, the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command, so that the effect related to the push order navigation cannot be executed. When the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M side sends a command related to the AT addition lottery winning and the number of AT addition games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command. In addition, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of games has elapsed from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress", and the AT counter value becomes 0, so that the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". In that case (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay is won, the number of AT games will not be added, so white seven or black seven will be selected. It is configured to navigate the push order that is not in a straight line. Further, when the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, and the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", it is still an "advantageous section". The push order bell may generate push order navigation, but the push order replay may be configured so that push order navigation does not occur.

When the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2308, No in step 2310, and No in step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image in step 2316 based on the state related to AT, and then displays the effect image and the background image. (Processing in step 2110).

<Processing during AT when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing the process during AT at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and the instruction number in step 2356. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display of the push order replay game are displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number and the display color related to the number is the same. ) Can be applied when it is configured to be displayed. Further, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, and the push order bell is used. It may be configured to display different production images when the push order navigation is executed and when the push order navigation is executed related to the push order replay game.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A1 which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → middle → right" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is circled. Display in the display mode.

Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order has three choices, it is information that corresponds the first stop button to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push-order navigation display.

In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, if No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of step 2360, 2364 or 2368, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 10 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 10 games or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

If No in step 2376, or if the process in step 2378 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2380 whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2380 or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 11 games or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode A (display mode described above). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is more conspicuous than B).

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2388. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

If No in step 2386, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2392. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2390 or when the process of step 2392 is executed. In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a more conspicuous display mode than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" Along with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the white seven and black seven do not stop and display on the invalid line. The middle reel in the push order is the first stop reel. It is configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player that the number of AT remaining games is small. Can be configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B by displaying an arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (for example, a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed) is encouraged to continue. , Battle effect) is also configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" Are not displayed during the execution of the battle effect so as not to interfere with the visibility of the battle effect. be able to. Further, with this configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and it is displayed that the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" ends, the battle effect is in progress. If a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command has been received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message that the "AT in progress state" is terminated is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on winning the forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added to the game that won the AT additional lottery. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a subsequent timing, which enhances the fun of the game.

<Specialized precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing a special precursor process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG. 37.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2402, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2404, and the instruction number in step 2406. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A2, which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. In the first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in step 2412, and the condition device of the game is the push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order has three choices, it is information that corresponds the first stop button to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower center side of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

Next, if No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the forward push instruction command. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2418. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2422. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is not received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2424 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. In the case of Yes in step 2424, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or when No in step 2424, the background image during AT is displayed in step 2428. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step S2430, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Special processing for adding when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 37.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2452, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2454, and the instruction number in step 2456. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4 push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. In the first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order has three choices, the information corresponds to the first stop button corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower center side of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the forward push instruction command. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left-> middle-> right" as the push order navigation display in step 2468. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the push order is forward push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively, from left to right. The push order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the reverse push instruction command. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the reverse push navigation display in step 2472. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the push order is reverse push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, from right to left. The push order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the avoidance command is a general term for both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward push avoidance command is received, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40 in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right". Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

Next, in the case of No in step 2474 described above, in other words, when the avoidance command is not received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not display the push order navigation in step 2478.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476 or 2478 described above, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40 in step 2480. In step S2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG. 37.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2702, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2704, and the instruction number in step 2706. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal medium game, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the game in step 2710. Condition The device determines whether it is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4 push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. In the first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since the push order has three choices, the information corresponds to the first stop button corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower center side of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received the command related to 7 replays. Judge whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display as the first number. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or when No in step 2718, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. It is displayed, and in step S2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed after shifting to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the effect display device S40. In, it is notified that the BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

<Processing at the time of the first body stop reception>
Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the first processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2500 in FIG.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has an operation of the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Judge whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displayed in the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is forward-pressed navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation (forward push black replay or reverse push white 7 replay is instructed to align with the invalid line) is being displayed. In step 2508, in the case of Yes, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (continues to be darkened in the game), and moves to the next process (process of step 2110). Migrate.

In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, when the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays in step 2512, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the second body stop>
Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing the second processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2550 of FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the second stop in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display related to the stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. It is erased, the push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, or if No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, immediately , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of the 3rd body stop reception>
Next, FIG. 44 is a subroutine showing the third processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 of FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces a successful pressing order effect. "GET!" Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the "GET" of the pressing order success effect. ! ”Is not displayed.

If No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, if No in step 2604, in other words, the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610. When the process of is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of AT remaining games to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S calculates the difference from the previously received command indicating the number of AT remaining games. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of AT games added, and to display the number of AT games added.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the AT addition game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is added to the AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2616. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. In addition, as a method of notifying the number of AT additional games, (1) all of the additional games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the additional games is notified by the game, and the remaining number of games is notified after the game. (3) The number of additional games is not notified in the game, and the games after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when the common bell is won (when the role that is not originally added), or a plurality of games are notified. After executing the game (continuous production), the operation of the bet button D220 and the operation of the start lever D50 of the game in which the number of remaining games of the effect display device S40 is "0" or the next game of the game in which the number of remaining games is "0". ) Can be notified.

Note that the common bell in the special addition state does not display the number of AT addition games even when stopped according to the push order navigation (the AT addition lottery is not performed in the common bell).

Next, FIG. 45 is an image of performing an effect during AT according to the present embodiment. First, on the left side of the figure, the daytime background is displayed on the effect display device S40 under the situation that the state related to AT is "AT in progress", and "winning-A1" (push order bell) is displayed as a condition device. Winning, the push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right" is displayed in a circular figure with numbers (first number display mode group). Further, in the center of the figure, the daytime background is displayed on the effect display device S40 under the situation that the state related to AT is "specialization precursor state", and "winning-A1" (push order bell) as a condition device. Is won, and the push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right" is displayed as a number (second number display mode group) in the star-shaped figure. Further, on the right side of the figure, the night background is displayed on the effect display device S40 under the situation that the state related to AT is "additional specialization state", and "winning-A1" (push order bell) as a condition device. Is won, and the push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right" is displayed as a number (first number display mode group) in the circular figure. As described above, although the background effect is different between the case where the state related to AT is the "AT in progress state" and the case where the state is the "additional specialized state", the display mode group of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. Are the same. Further, the background effect is the same between the case where the state related to AT is "AT in progress state" and the case where it is "specialized precursor state", but the display mode group of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is different. ing. In the figure, the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is shown as an example, but the same configuration is used when displaying other push order navigations. Further, in the present embodiment, the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state" are configured so that the number of remaining AT games is not subtracted by the execution of the game.

Next, FIG. 46 is an image 2 of an effect execution during AT according to the present embodiment. First, in the upper left of the figure, in the situation where the state related to AT is "AT in progress", the "winning-A1", which is the push order bell role, is won, and the effect display device S40 is used inside the circular figure. The drawn numbers (first number display mode group) display a push order navigation display to the effect that the stop button D40 is operated in the order of "left → middle → right", and at the same time, the push order display device D270 displays "left →". The display of "= 1" corresponding to the pressing order of the stop button D40 of "middle → right" is displayed. When the player operates the left stop button D41, which is a stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop, a display prompting the operation of the middle stop button D42 is displayed as the second stop (effect display device S40. The display of "2" in the push order navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the middle stop button D42, which is a stop button based on the correct pressing order, is operated as the second stop, a display prompting the operation of the right stop button D43 is displayed as the third stop (pressing of the effect display device S40). The display of "3" in the forward navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the right stop button D43 is operated, all the operations of the stop button D40 are executed according to the push-order navigation, and 11 bells, which is the maximum number of payouts, are awarded, resulting in 11 medals. The game medal is paid out, and the effect display device S40 displays "GET !!".

On the other hand, on the upper left side of the figure, when the player operates the middle stop button D42, which is a stop button different from the left stop button D41, which is a stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop, the effect display device S40. All the push order navigation displays in the above are deleted, and the characters "Bad ..." are displayed as a push order failure effect. Next, the right stop button D43 and the left stop button D41 are operated in this order, and all the stop button D40 operations are completed, but the stop button D40 is pressed in the order of "middle-> right-> left", which is the incorrect push order. The operation is performed, and one of the condition devices "winning 08" to "winning 10" wins a prize, and one game medal is paid out. The characters "GET !!" are not displayed on the effect display device S40. That is, when the stop button D40 is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer according to the instruction of the push order navigation, there is a maximum payout number (there is the most advantageous payout number in the winning condition device), and the player Is displayed on the effect display device S40, but when the stop button D40 is operated in the incorrect pressing order, the pressing order is reached when the incorrect stop button is operated. Even when a display indicating that the navigation has failed is displayed and all the operations of the stop buttons D40 are completed, the effect display device S40 is configured so that the effect congratulating the player is not displayed. By stopping the reels in the push order of 11 payouts, which is the maximum number of payouts, "GET!" Is not displayed, but according to the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. "GET!" Will be displayed depending on whether or not the reel is stopped. That is, in the situation where the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the push order navigation, the reels are stopped in the order of "middle → right → left" to obtain the maximum number of payouts. When the reel is won, "GET!" Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "normal game state" is not displayed, when the push order bell is won and the player stops the reel in any push order, the correct answer happens to be in the push order of 6 choices. Even if 11 payouts are obtained, the effect display device S40 is configured so that "GET!" Is not displayed. Similarly, with regard to the push order failure effect, the push order failure effect is displayed by stopping the reels in the push order in which the maximum number of payouts is 11 (one payout). This is not the case, and the push order failure effect is displayed depending on whether or not the reel is stopped without following the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. That is, in the situation where the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the push order navigation, the reels are stopped in the order of "middle → right → left" to obtain the maximum number of payouts. Even if the reels win a prize, the push order failure effect is executed on the effect display device S40. If the stop button is operated in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order, the pressing order navigation display on the pressing order display device D270 is displayed until (1) the reel related to the third stop is stopped (2). Until the stop button that is different from the correct push order is operated, (3) until the stop button that is different from the correct push order is operated and the reel related to the stop button is stopped, and (4) the bet button related to the next game is It may be configured to display until it is operated (5) until the start lever related to the next game is operated.

Next, FIG. 47 is an image of performing an effect during AT according to the present embodiment. First, on the left side of the figure, under the situation where the state related to AT is "additional specialization state" and the state related to RT is "RT1", the player wins "Replay-C" which is a replay with 7 forward push blacks. In addition, the number of AT games is added to the lottery (winning at 1/2), and the black seven can be aligned on the invalid line (lower line) on the production display device S40. "Left → Middle → Right" The push order navigation display corresponding to is displayed by an arrow (display mode by the image of the arrow), and the message "Aim for 7 !!" is displayed. The push order display device D270 is hidden (the push order navigation is not displayed). At this time, at the same time, the decorative lamp unit D150 of FIG. 1 is used to emit light that undulates from left to right (for example, the decorative lamp on the left blinks so as to flow from bottom to top, followed by it. , The decoration lamp on the right can suggest the flow from left to right by blinking so that it flows from top to bottom.) By doing, it suggests "left → middle → right", etc. The push order navigation may be executed by the lamp unit D150. Thereby, for example, even if the push order navigation cannot be displayed due to a defect of the effect display device S40, it can be suggested that the game is a game aiming at 7 in the order of "left → middle → right". Further, in the present embodiment, the replay game is adopted as a role for aligning the 7 sets to the invalid line, but when the push order bell whose number of sheets varies depending on the push order is used as a substitute, the defect of the effect display device S40 is fatal. Therefore, the suggestion of push order navigation using the decorative lamp unit D150 works more effectively. In the case of the push order bell, even if a problem occurs in the effect display device S40, the push order display device D270 continues to display the push order navigation, but in the case of a new player, the push order display device. Since it is not easy to understand the pressing order represented by the display mode of the D270, it can be expected to play an insurance role against irregular situations by using the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150 that is visually easy to understand. After that, when the stop button D40 is operated in the order of "left-> middle-> right", it is displayed that "50 games" have been added as the number of AT-added games to the effect display device S40. On the other hand, the push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right" is displayed with an arrow (display mode by the image of the arrow), and the message "Aim for 7 !!" is displayed. , When the middle stop button (stop button other than the left stop button which is the correct stop button) is operated at the first stop, the entire screen goes dark, but the arrow push order navigation corresponding to "left → middle → right" The display and the display of the message "Aim for 7 !!" are not deleted. After that, when all the reels are stopped, it is displayed on the effect display device S40 that "50 games" have been added as the number of AT added games. Since the lottery for adding the number of AT games is won at the time of winning the replay with 7 forward push blacks, the number of AT games will be added regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is followed. In addition, on the right side of the figure, under the situation where the state related to AT is "additional specialization state" and the state related to RT is "RT1", the player wins "Replay-C" which is a replay with 7 forward push blacks. However, if the lottery for adding the number of AT games is not won (it will be non-winning at 1/2), the black seven will not be aligned on the invalid line (lower line) on the production display device S40 ("Left"). As the push order navigation display corresponding to the push order other than "→ middle → right", the push order navigation instructing the middle stop button D42 as the stop button related to the first stop is displayed. The push order display device D270 is hidden. Next, after that, the middle stop button D42 was operated as the first stop button, but the effect of adding the number of games does not occur. As described above, in the present embodiment, the "re-game-C1" is a condition device in which the interests for the player are the same regardless of the pressing order, and the AT addition lottery is executed based on the operation of the start lever. That is, whether or not to win the AT additional lottery is determined based on the operation of the start lever, and it is configured so that the presence or absence of winning the AT additional lottery does not differ depending on the pushing order. As an effect to show, if you win "Re-game-C" and win the AT addition lottery, instruct the push order ("left → middle → right") that allows Black Seven to line up on the invalid line. As a result, it is possible for the players to feel as if the number of AT games has been increased due to the arrangement of the Black Seven, and the interest of the game is improved. On the other hand, if "Re-game-C" is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the push order (other than "left → middle → right") in which Black Seven cannot be aligned with the invalid line is instructed. By doing so, the player does not notice that Black Seven has won the replay that can be aligned with the invalid line, that is, he does not notice that he has not won the lottery with the number of AT games added, so extra stress is added. You can proceed with the game without feeling it. If the reels are stopped in a push order in which it is impossible for Black Seven to line up with the invalid line, the normal replay (for example, replay 01) in which the RT state does not shift will be stopped and displayed. From this, the player can proceed with the game without any discomfort. In addition, by instructing the push order (other than "left → middle → right") that Black Seven cannot align with the invalid line when the lottery for adding the number of AT games is not won, the number of AT games will not be added. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable when the Black Seven is aligned on the invalid line. Further, in a state related to AT (sometimes referred to as AT) in which push order navigation can normally occur such as "AT in progress state", a particularly high effect can be expected, but push in "normal game state" or the like. The same may be performed for a state related to AT (sometimes referred to as non-AT) in which forward navigation does not occur. In this case, unlike during AT, push order navigation does not normally occur, so for example, when "Replay-C" is won, it is impossible for Black Seven to line up on the invalid line. Sudden push order (other than "left → middle → right") may give the player a sense of discomfort, but there is a possibility that Black 7 will accidentally line up on the invalid line during non-AT. Some situations are not desirable, as there is a concern that the 7-match on the invalid line may make the player aware of some benefits. In the figure, an example of the effect of adding the number of AT games when the player wins the "replay-C", which is a forward push black 7 replay, and wins the AT addition lottery, is illustrated. The effect mode for notifying the addition of the number of games is not limited to this. For example, when an AT addition lottery is won in a certain game and the number of remaining AT games is 50 games added, the game that wins the AT addition lottery. In, without notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, in the game that won the "Replay-C1" which is a forward push black 7 replay in the subsequent game, it becomes an invalid line (lower line). The push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right", which is the push order in which Black Seven can be aligned, is displayed with an arrow (display mode by the image of the arrow), and the message "Aim for 7 !!" is displayed. It may be configured to display and notify that the number of remaining AT games has been added by 50 games by aligning the black sevens on the invalid line (lower line). Similarly, for "replay-B", which is a reverse push white 7 replay, for example, when an AT addition lottery is won in a certain game and the number of remaining AT games is 50 games added, the AT addition lottery is performed. In the game that won the game, the invalid line (lower row) is played in the game that won the "Replay-B", which is a reverse push white 7 replay in the subsequent game, without notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added. The push order navigation display corresponding to "right → middle → left", which is the push order in which white sevens can be aligned on the line), is displayed with an arrow (display mode by the image of the arrow), and "Aim for 7! Message is displayed, and white sevens are aligned on the invalid line (lower line) to notify that the number of remaining AT games has been added by 50 games. In addition, "Re-game-C" and "Re-game-B" are won and the number of AT games is added to the lottery, and the number of AT-added games related to the winning is already won in the previous game. If the situation is not notified, the number of AT-added games related to the game and the number of AT-added games related to the previous game are added up, and the 7 replays in the game are aligned at the invalid line. It may be configured so that the total number of games can be notified.

Next, FIG. 48 is an image of performing an effect during AT according to the present embodiment. First, in the upper left of the figure, under the situation where the state related to AT is "additional specialization state" and the state related to RT is "RT1", "winning-A1" is established as a condition device that is a push order bell, and "winning-A1" is established. The push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right" is displayed on the effect display device S40, and "= 1" is displayed on the push order display device D270. After that, when the stop button D40 is operated by "left → middle → right" according to the push order navigation display, the bell wins and 11 cards are paid out, and the display "+ 10G" indicating that the number of AT games has been successfully added. Is displayed on the effect display device S40. As shown in FIG. 28, in the "additional specialization state" in which the player can stay until 10 games are exhausted (the "additional specialization state" shifts to the "AT in progress state" by digesting 10 games). , The push order bell and the push order replay are also configured to execute the AT game number lottery. Here, in the present embodiment, both the push order bell and the push order replay are configured to win 100% in the AT game number lottery (addition of one or more AT games is executed). However, this is not limited, and in the push order bell, it is configured to win 100% in the AT game number lottery (addition of the number of AT games is executed for one or more games), but push. In the forward replay game, the probability of winning the AT additional lottery may be 70% (the number of AT games is added to one or more games). Further, in the upper right of the figure, under the situation where the state related to AT is "additional specialized state" and the state related to RT is "RT1", "winning-B" is established as a condition device which is a common bell. Here, the common bell has the same benefit for the player regardless of the push order, and it is a small role in which the lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed, but in the "additional specialization state", "left → middle → The push order navigation display corresponding to "right" is set to the effect display device S40, and the push order display device D270 is hidden. After that, the stop button D40 is operated by "left-> middle-> right" according to the push order navigation display on the effect display device S40, but the effect related to the addition of the game is not displayed. Further, in the lower left of the figure, under the situation where the state related to AT is "AT in progress" and the state related to RT is "RT1", "Winning-A1" is established as a condition device for pushing order bell, and "Left". The push order navigation display corresponding to “→ middle → right” is displayed on the effect display device S40, and “= 1” is displayed on the push order display device D270. After that, when the stop button D40 is operated by "left-> middle-> right" according to the push-order navigation display, the bell wins and 11 cards are paid out, and the effect related to the addition of the number of AT games is not displayed. Next, in the lower right of the figure, under the situation where the state related to AT is "AT in progress" and the state related to RT is "RT1", "Winning-B" is established as a condition device that is a common bell, and the effect display is displayed. The push order navigation is not displayed in the device S40, and is hidden in the push order display device D270. Next, when the three stop buttons D40 are operated, the bell wins a prize and 11 cards are paid out regardless of which pressing order is used. In this way, when the common bell is won, the push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270 when it is in the "AT in progress state", while it is in the "addition special state". The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270, but the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. With this configuration, in the "addition specialization state", even if the common bell is won, the addition of the number of AT games is not executed, but the addition of the number of AT games can be executed. By executing the same push order navigation, it is not possible to determine that the bell is not the push order bell but the common bell before the reel is stopped, that is, AT in the game at the timing before the reel is stopped. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes clear that the addition of the number of games is not executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, when the common bell is won, the push order display device D270 may display the same push order navigation as the push order bell. In this case, in addition to the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is also displayed by the push order display device D270, so that the player follows the push order navigation at the timing before the reel stop of the game. Since it is not possible to completely grasp whether the result is a push order bell or a common bell, a higher effect is exhibited. As a specific means, when the common bell is won, a predetermined specific push order can be fixedly displayed, or a push order that can be displayed by the push order bell can be selectively displayed. It can also be displayed. The former has the advantage of reducing the processing load because the process of selecting the push order is not performed, and the latter has the advantage of being able to execute a more natural push order navigation display by eliminating variations in the push order. .. Further, as the end condition of the "additional specialized state", the end may be made with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) when the "re-game-A" is won, or the "additional specialized state" may be set. After the minimum guaranteed number of games to be played (stayed at) (for example, 5 games) has passed and the minimum guaranteed game has elapsed, the game ends with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) when "Replay-A" is won. If "Replay-A" is won even during the minimum guaranteed number of games (for example, 5 games), the end lottery of "additional specialization state" (for example, winning at 30% of each game) Even if you win the end lottery, you may end after the minimum number of guaranteed games has passed without ending the "additional specialization state" until the minimum guaranteed game has passed. ..

In the following, a process of generating bonus winning information and winning / re-game winning information from the winning number, a process of determining the production group number from the winning / re-game winning information, and a process of determining the payout group number will be described. By executing the processing described below, the program processing stored in the ROM of the main control board M can be simplified, and the program area and the data area required for the program processing can be compressed.

<<< Processing to generate bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information from the winning number >>>
In the following, a process of generating two types of winning information, bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information, from the winning number will be described. As described above, the conditional device number can be referred to as a winning number, and hereinafter, referred to as a winning number. The winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means. Two types of winning information, bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information, are generated from the determined winning number and stored in another storage area of the built-in RAMC 120. In the process here, the winning number itself is not stored in the built-in RAMC 120.

In the process of generating the bonus winning information and the winning / replay winning information, the winning information related to the bonus combination and the winning / replay winning information are generated from the winning number using the winning information generation table shown in FIG. 49. By using the winning information generation table, the control process can be simplified and the burden of the control process can be reduced. The winning information generation table is stored in the built-in ROMC110.

<Specific method>
A numerical value from 0 to 27 is specified as the winning number. As shown in FIG. 10, the winning numbers 0 to 18 are assigned as winning numbers not including the bonus combination, and the winning numbers 19 to 27 are assigned as the winning numbers including the bonus combination. By allocating in this way, if the winning numbers are 0 to 18, it can be immediately determined that the winning information or the re-game winning information is used. If the winning number is 19 or more, the winning information regarding the bonus combination and the winning / replay winning information are generated from the winning number.

<Table for generating winning information>
A specific example of the winning information generation table is shown in FIG. The winning information generation table shown in FIG. 49 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC110 and the data stored in the address. In the example shown in FIG. 49, the address is shown in decimal (H) and the data is shown in decimal (D).

As shown in FIG. 49, the data 19D is stored in the address 1300H, the data 38D is stored in the address 1301H, the data 52D is stored in the address 1302H, and the data 53D is stored in the address 1303H. Data 54D is stored in address 1304H, data 57D is stored in address 1305H, data 71D is stored in address 1306H, data 72D is stored in address 1307H, and data 72D is stored in address 1308H. Data 73D is stored.

The address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19, the address 1301H corresponds to the winning number 20, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21, the address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22, and the address 1304H corresponds to the winning number 22. Corresponding to winning number 23, address 1305H corresponds to winning number 24, address 1306H corresponds to winning number 25, address 1307H corresponds to winning number 26, and address 1308H corresponds to winning number 27. ..

The data of the winning information generation table is determined from (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information) shown in FIG. The data stored in the winning information generation table is determined by (data) = (bonus winning information corresponding to the winning number) x 19D + (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number).

For example, the address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 19) = 1D (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 19). = 0D. Therefore, the data at the address 1300H becomes 19D by calculating 1D × 19D + 0D. Further, the address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 22) = 2D (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 22). = 15D. Therefore, the data at address 1303H becomes 53D by calculating 2D × 19D + 15D. Furthermore, the address 1308H corresponds to the winning number 27, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 27) = 3D, and (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 27). ) = 16D. Therefore, the data at the address 1308H becomes 73D by calculating 3D × 19D + 16D. The values calculated in advance in this way are stored in each of the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the built-in ROMC110. In other words, (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information) are encoded by the above-mentioned formula, and the values are stored in each of the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the built-in ROMC110.

<Processing of winning information determination>
The winning numbers determined by the winning combination lottery means are stored in the A register and the L register. Next, the comparison operation between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D is executed. Specifically, the process of subtracting 19D from the data stored in the A register is executed. When the carry flag = 1 is not achieved by this arithmetic processing, the winning information generation table shown in FIG. 49 is referred to. The comparison operation between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D is a process for determining whether or not to refer to the winning information generation table.

As a result of comparing the data stored in the A register with the value 19D, if the data stored in the A register is less than 19D (when the carry flag = 1 is not obtained), the data is stored in the L register. The stored data is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as winning / replay winning information.

As a result of comparing the data stored in the A register with the value 19D, if the data stored in the A register is 19D or more (when the carry flag = 1), the following processing is executed. ..

First, 12EDH is stored in the HL register. This 12EDH is an address value obtained by subtracting 13H (19D) from 1300H. In the following processing, the target address is determined using this 12EDH as a reference address.

The A register is added to the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register to obtain the target address. In other words, the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register becomes the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register becomes the offset value. In this way, the target address is obtained by using the reference address and the offset value, the data stored in the target address is read out, and the data is stored in the A register.

Next, the value stored in the A register is divided by 19D, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the L register. The value (quotient) of the A register is (bonus winning information), and the value (remainder) of the L register is (winning / replay winning information). By doing so, it is possible to decode into (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information).

Next, the information stored in the A register is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as bonus winning information, and the information stored in the L register is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as winning / replay winning information.

<Example 1 When the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is 19D (13H) and 19D is stored in the A register>
By executing the comparison operation between the data 19D stored in the A register and the value 19D, the carry flag = 1. Based on this result, 12EDH (HL register) + 13H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1300H, and the data 19D of 1300H is read out and stored in the A register, so that the A register = 19D.

Next, 19D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 1D and the remainder is 0D. As described above, the address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19. Therefore, it can be decoded that the (bonus winning information) of the winning number 19 is 1 and the (winning / replay winning information) of the winning number 19 is 0.

<Example 2 When the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is 21D (15H) and 21D is stored in the A register>
By executing the comparison operation between the data 21D stored in the A register and the value 19D, the carry flag = 1. Based on this result, 12EDH (HL register) + 15H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1302H, and the data 52D of 1302H is read out and stored in the A register, so that the A register = 52D.

Next, 52D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 2D and the remainder is 14D. As described above, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21. Therefore, it can be decoded that the (bonus winning information) of the winning number 21 is 2 and the (winning / replay winning information) of the winning number 21 is 14.

<<< Processing to determine the production group number from the winning / replay winning information >>>
The process of determining the production group number from the winning / replay winning information will be described.
In the processing on the main control board M side, the winning / replay winning number is stored in the RAM, and when the bonus combination is won, the winning number of the bonus combination is stored in another storage area of the RAM. Further, in the main control board M, the effect group number determination table is stored in the ROM. The production group number determination table is used to determine the production group number from the winning / replay winning numbers. The production group number determination table is duplicated for the winning / replay winning numbers. By referring to the production group number determination table, the production group number can be determined from the winning / replay winning numbers. In the effect group number determination table, the effect group numbers are stored corresponding to each of the plurality of addresses. The production group number can be determined by determining the address from the winning / replay winning number and reading the production group number stored in the address.

<Direction group number>
The production group number is information corresponding to winning / replay winning information, and at least a part of the information is grouped. This effect group number is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. For example, push order replays with fluctuations in RT can be grouped into the same effect group number, and push order bells with different payouts can be grouped into the same effect group number.

<< Example 1 of the production group number determination table >>
The production group number determination table is a table for specifying the production group number by using the winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in the built-in ROMC110. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a first specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effect group number determination table 1. The effect group number determination table 1 shown in FIG. 50 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored in the address. In the example shown in FIG. 50, the address is shown in decimal (H) and the data is shown in decimal (D).

As shown in FIG. 50, data 0D is stored at address 1200H, data 1D is stored at address 1201H, data 2D is stored at address 1202H, and data 3D is stored at address 1203H. , Data 4D is stored in address 1204H, data 4D is stored in address 1205H, data 4D is stored in address 1206H, data 5D is stored in address 1207H, and data 5D is stored in address 1208H. Data 5D is stored, data 5D is stored at address 1209H, data 5D is stored at address 120AH, data 5D is stored at address 120BH, and data 5D is stored at address 120CH. Data 6D is stored in the address 120DH, data 7D is stored in the address 120EH, data 8D is stored in the address 120FH, data 9D is stored in the address 1210H, and data is stored in the address 1211H. 10D is stored, and data 11D is stored at address 1212H.

Note that the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 0, the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 1, the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 2, the address 1203H corresponds to the winning number 3, and the address 1204H corresponds to the winning number 1. Corresponding to winning number 4, address 1205H corresponds to winning number 5, address 1206H corresponds to winning number 6, address 1207H corresponds to winning number 7, and address 1208H corresponds to winning number 8. , Address 1209H corresponds to winning number 9, address 120AH corresponds to winning number 10, address 120BH corresponds to winning number 11, address 120CH corresponds to winning number 12, and address 120DH corresponds to winning number 12. Corresponding to number 13, address 120EH corresponds to winning number 14, address 120FH corresponds to winning number 15, address 1210H corresponds to winning number 16, address 1211H corresponds to winning number 17, and so on. The address 1212H corresponds to the winning number 18.

<Processing of determining the production group number>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is stored in the C register. Next, the effect group number can be obtained by adding the value of the C register to the value of the HL register and reading the value stored in the address of the built-in ROMC110 indicated by the added value. In other words, 1200H stored in the HL register becomes the reference address, and the winning / replay winning information stored in the C register becomes the offset value. In this way, the target address can be obtained by using the reference address and the offset value, the data stored in the target address can be read out, and the effect group number can be obtained.

For example, when the winning number 7 is determined by the winning combination lottery means, 1207H is obtained by 1200H + 7D. The data corresponding to the address 1207H of the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to 5. Further, when the winning number 12 is determined by the winning combination lottery means, 120CH is obtained by 1200H + 12D. The data corresponding to the address 120CH of the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to 5.

<< Example 2 of the production group number determination table >>
In Example 1 of the effect group number determination table described above, an example of using an effect group number determination table in which one effect group number is associated with one address of the built-in ROMC110 is shown, but for one address. The effect group number determination table may be defined by associating the two effect group numbers. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a second specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it will be referred to as an effect group number determination table 2. The effect group number determination table 2 shown in FIG. 51 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored in the address. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in binary (D). In addition, in FIG. 51, a symbol “/” is inserted between the upper part and the lower part in order to clearly show the division between the upper 4 bit data and the lower 4 bit data. In reality, the data consists of only 0s and 1s.

The lower 4 bits of the data stored in the effect group number determination table 2 correspond to the even winning numbers, and the upper 4 bits of the data correspond to the odd winning numbers. Specifically, the measures are as follows.

As shown in FIG. 51, 0001/0000B is stored in the address 1200H. The lower 4 bits 0000 correspond to the winning number 0, and the upper 4 bits 0001 correspond to the winning number 1. 0011/0010B is stored in the address 1201H. The lower 4 bits 0010 correspond to the winning number 2, and the upper 4 bits 0011 correspond to the winning number 3. 0100 / 0100B is stored in the address 1202H. The lower 4 bits 0100 corresponds to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0100 corresponds to the winning number 4. 0101/0100B is stored in the address 1203H. The lower 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5.

Further, 0101 / 0101B is stored in the address 1204H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. 0101 / 0101B is stored in the address 1205H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. 0110 / 0101B is stored in the address 1206H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0110 correspond to the winning number 6. 1000 / 0111B is stored in the address 1207H. The lower 4 bits 0111 correspond to the winning number 7, and the upper 4 bits 1000 correspond to the winning number 8. 1010 / 1001B is stored in the address 1208H. The lower 4 bits 1001 correspond to the winning number 9, and the upper 4 bits 1010 correspond to the winning number 10. 0000 / 1011B is stored in the address 1209H. The lower 4 bits 1011 correspond to the winning number 11.

<Processing of determining the production group number >>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is stored in the A register. Next, a shift operation for shifting the data in the A register to the right is executed. By this shift calculation, if the carry flag is 1, it can be determined that the winning / replay winning information is an odd number, and if the carry flag is 0, it is determined that the winning / replay winning information is an even number. can do. If the winning / replay winning information is odd, the upper 4 bits of the data stored in the built-in ROMC110 may be read, and if the winning / replay winning information is even, it is stored in the built-in ROMC110. The lower 4 bits of the data being stored may be read out.

Further, as described above, since the data in the A register is shifted to the right, the value of the winning / replay winning information is divided by 2. Since this value indicates the relative distance (offset value) from the address 1200H, the address to be read can be calculated by adding the A register to the HL register.

When the winning / replay winning information is odd, the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the data stored in the address are exchanged, and the logical product is taken with 00001111B, so that the production group number stored in the upper 4 bits is obtained. Can be obtained. Further, when the winning / replay winning information is an even number, the effect group number stored in the lower 4 bits can be acquired by taking the logical product of the data stored in the address as it is with 00000111B.

In this way, by defining the address and the upper 4 bits or the lower 4 bits, the effect group number stored in the effect group number determination table 2 can be determined.

<< Example 3 of the production group number determination table >>
As described above, the effect group number determination table is a table for specifying the effect group number by using the winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in the built-in ROMC110. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a third specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it will be referred to as an effect group number determination table 3. The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 52 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored in the address. In the example shown in FIG. 52, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in binary (B).

The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 52 is a table for specifying the effect group number by counting the value (1 (or 0)) defined corresponding to the winning / replay winning information. ..

As shown in FIG. 52, the address 1200H stores the data 01111001B, the address 1201H stores the data 00000111B, and the address 1202H stores the data 11100000B.

The address 1200H corresponds to the winning numbers 0 to 7, the address 1201H corresponds to the winning numbers 8 to 15, and the address 1202H corresponds to the winning numbers 16 to 18. Specifically, the 7th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 0, the 6th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 1, the 5th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 2, and the address 1200H. The 4th bit corresponds to the winning number 3, the 3rd bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 4, the 2nd bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 5, and the 1st bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 6. Correspondingly, the 0th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 7.

Further, the 7th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 8, the 6th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 9, the 5th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 10, and the 4th bit of the address 1201H. Corresponds to the winning number 11, the third bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 12, the second bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 13, and the first bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 14. The 0th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 15.

Further, the 7th bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 16, the 6th bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 17, and the 5th bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 18.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the winning numbers 0 to 18, the production group number of one winning number is the same as the production group number of the winning number immediately before that, which is the same as the production group number of the winning number. It may be a number. For example, the production group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the production group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the production group number of the winning number 3 is relative to the production group number of the winning number 2. It has increased by one. Further, the production group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the production group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the production group number of the winning number 11 is relative to the production group number of the winning number 10. Does not change.

The effect group number determination table 3 is a table configured by paying attention to such a change in the effect group number. When the production group number of one winning number increases by 1 with respect to the production group number of the immediately preceding winning number, the value corresponding to the one winning number is set to 1, and it does not change with respect to the immediately preceding production group number. In this case, the effect group number determination table 3 is defined with the value corresponding to one winning number as 0.

In the above example, the production group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the production group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the production group number of the winning number 3 is the production group of the winning number 2. Since the number is increased by 1 with respect to the number, the value corresponding to the winning number 3 is set to 1 (see the 4th bit of the address 1200H). Further, the production group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the production group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the production group number of the winning number 11 is relative to the production group number of the winning number 10. Since it has not changed, the value corresponding to the winning number 11 is set to 0 (see the 4th bit of the address 1201H). That is, the value of the change in the effect group number is stored in the effect group number determination table 3 in correspondence with the winning number.

As described above, in Example 3 of the effect group number determination table, it is sufficient to secure an area for one bit for one winning number, and the table data to be stored in the built-in ROMC 110 can also be compressed.

<Processing of determining the production group number>
First, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 is read and stored in the HL register, and the value obtained by adding 1H to the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery means is stored in the C register. Let me. Further, 8H is stored in the B register. Next, a shift operation is performed as the number of times to shift the value stored in the C register with respect to the data stored in the HL register. In this process, an operation of shifting to the left is performed, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted at the time of the shift operation, and the counted result becomes the effect group number.

If the value stored in the C register is less than 8, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and shifted with respect to the data stored in the HL register. Perform the operation. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H in this shift operation is counted, and the counted result is used as the effect group number.

Further, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, the data stored in the 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 is first read, stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register. A shift operation is executed on the data, and the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. Subsequently, the data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROMC110 is read, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is executed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, and the first In addition to the counting result of, the added result is used as the production group number. In this way, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, the effect group number can be acquired by using the data stored in the 1200H and 1201H of the built-in ROMC110.

Furthermore, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 is first read, stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register. A shift operation is executed on the data, and the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. Subsequently, the data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROMC110 is read, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is executed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, and the first Add to the counting result of. Further, the data stored in 1202H of the built-in ROMC110 is read, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is executed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, and the first In addition to the counting result of, the added result is used as the production group number. In this way, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, the effect group number can be acquired by using the data stored in the 1200H, 1201H, and 1202H of the built-in ROMC110. ..

By doing so, the data stored in the built-in ROMC110 1200H to 1202H is read according to the value stored in the C register, and the total number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is calculated to produce the effect. You can get the group number.

<Example 1 When the winning / replay winning information is 0D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 0D, the number of shifts is 1 by 0D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, the operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left is executed once. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H becomes 0D, and "0" is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 2 When the winning / replay winning information is 5D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 5D, the number of shifts is 6 times by 5D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, the operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by 6 times is executed. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H becomes 4D, and "4" is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 3 When the winning / replay winning information is 10D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 5D, the number of shifts is 11 times by 10D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, the operation of first shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by eight times is executed. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation becomes 5D.

Further, since the number of shifts is 8 or more, next, 20000111B stored in the address 1201H of the built-in ROMC110 is read, stored in the HL register, and then 2 for the data stored in the HL register. Performs an operation that shifts to the left. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H becomes 5D, and "5" is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 4 When the winning / replay winning information is 18D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 18D, the number of shifts is 19 times due to 18D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, the operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left is executed eight times. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation becomes 5D.

Further, since the number of shifts is 8 or more, next, after reading 100000111B stored in the address 1201H of the built-in ROMC110 and storing it in the HL register, 8 is obtained with respect to the data stored in the HL register. Performs an operation that shifts to the left. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 8D by adding 3D.

Further, since the number of shifts is 16 or more, next, 1110000B stored in the address 1202H of the built-in ROMC110 is read, stored in the HL register, and then 3 with respect to the data stored in the HL register. Performs an operation that shifts to the left. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is further added to 3D to become 11D, and "11" is determined as the effect group number.

In the above-described example, an example in which the number of 1Bs contained in the data stored in the effect group number determination table 3 is counted to determine the effect group number is shown, but it is stored in the effect group number determination table 3. The production group number may be determined by counting the number of 0Bs included in the data.

<<< Determining the ball output group number >>>
When determining the winning number by the winning combination lottery means, the lottery table is referred to. In this lottery table, winning numbers, random numbers, and the like for comparison with random numbers are stored. Furthermore, with reference to the lottery table, the payout group number is also determined together with the winning number. Therefore, the so-called lottery table also stores data corresponding to the payout group number. This payout group number is a number used when performing a lottery related to the instruction function (AT lottery, AT addition lottery, state transition lottery related to AT, etc.).

This payout group number is assigned according to the winning number, but it is not necessarily assigned in a one-to-one correspondence, and for some winning numbers, a duplicate payout group number may be assigned. is there. As the structure of the lottery table, it is possible to specify all the information for each of the winning numbers, but if the information about the duplicated ball output group numbers is also specified, the capacity of the lottery table becomes large and the lottery table is formed. It is also necessary to process the information read from the main control board M, and the processing on the main control board M has to be complicated. Therefore, when the lottery table is defined, the total capacity of the lottery table can be reduced by including the information indicating that the information regarding the duplicated ball output group numbers is duplicated, and the main control board M It is possible to improve the efficiency by simplifying the processing in.

FIG. 53 is a table showing an example of a lottery table. In addition, in FIG. 53, the case where the payout group number is 2 and the winning numbers are 6 of the winning numbers 7 to 12 is illustrated. The first row of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that the winning number is specified and that the winning number is 7D. The second row of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that the information regarding the payout group number is duplicated and that the number of duplications is 6D. The third row of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that the ball ejection group number is 2D as well as the data indicating the ball ejection group number. The fourth row of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that the number (determination value, probability data) is 2 bytes. The fifth row of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that the actual number (determination value, probability data) is 2034D.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, the winning number is 7, and the condition device (name) is the data of winning −A1 (see FIG. 10). As shown in FIG. 10, the condition device (name) of the winning number 8 is winning-A2, the condition device (name) of winning number 9 is winning-A3, and the condition device (name) of winning number 10 is. Is winning-A4, the conditional device (name) of winning number 11 is winning-A5, and the conditional device (name) of winning number 12 is winning-A6. The payout group numbers of these winning numbers 7 to 12 are all 2 in common, and are specified in duplicate. As described above, if the information regarding the payout group numbers for the winning numbers 7 to 12 is specified for each winning number, the capacity of the lottery table must be increased.

As shown in FIG. 53, data indicating that the number of duplications is 6 is stored in the second line. Therefore, it is possible to omit the information regarding the payout group number for the winning numbers 8 to 12, and the capacity of the lottery table can be reduced. Further, for the winning numbers 8 to 12, the process of reading the information regarding the payout group number from the lottery table can be omitted, and the process can be simplified and speeded up.

With the above configuration, according to the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a plurality of states related to AT are provided, and push order navigation and sub-control on the push order display device D270 on the main control board M side. By notifying the push order navigation on the effect display device on the board S side in an appropriate display mode based on the state related to AT, it is possible to make the game machine user-friendly.

(Example 1 of change from this embodiment)
In this embodiment, by winning the watermelon B in the "AT in progress state", it is possible to shift to the "additional specialization state", but the transition of the AT state (state in which push order navigation can occur) ( The configuration of (transition) is not limited to that of the present embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the transition (transition) of the AT state, which is different from the present embodiment, is referred to as change example 1 from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an AT state transition control process according to a modification example. This process corresponds to FIG. 20 described above. The processes of steps 1402 to 1434 and steps S1140 to 1444 are the same as the AT state transition control process shown in FIG. 20, and the processes of steps 1439-1 and 1439-2 are different.

In step 1426 in the first modification, the game section is the "advantageous section" when the AT-related state is the "high probability state", and the game section is the "advantageous section" when the state is "advantageous section". , Push order navigation is executed once or more, BB is executed once or more, or the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) "advantageous section" is not satisfied to continue, "advantageous section" Is configured so that "" does not end (that is, even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been executed more than once, etc., "" It is configured so that the "high probability state" does not end).

In step 1436, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the specialization state transition lottery has been won. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not a special state transition lottery has been won depending on whether or not a prize-E has been won as a conditional device. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in other words, when the specialization state transition lottery is won, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the process of step 1438, and in step 1439-1, the specialization winning command. (Command to sub side) is set. On the other hand, if No in step 1436, in other words, if the specialization state transition lottery has not been won, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a specialization non-winning command (to the sub side) in step 1439-2. Command) is set.

The special winning command is a command indicating that the transition to the additional specialized state has been won, and the special non-winning command is a command indicating that the transition to the additional specialized state has been missed (non-winning). As will be described later, when the specialized winning command is transmitted to the sub-control board S, a winning battle effect is executed, and when the specialized non-winning command is transmitted to the sub-control board S, a defeating battle effect is executed. Will be done.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the remaining game number management process according to the modification example. This process corresponds to FIG. 24 described above. The processes of steps 3402, 3404 and 3410 are the same as the remaining game number management process shown in FIG. 24, and the process of step S3408 is different.

In step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is an AT in-progress state, a specialization precursor state, or an additional specialization state. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in other words, when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state, the specialization precursor state, or the additional specialization state, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the AT counter value. Is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700).

By doing so, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted in the AT in-progress state, the specialization precursor state, or the additional specialization state.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a process when the start lever is operated according to the modification example. This process corresponds to FIG. 37 described above. The processes of steps 2302 to 2316, 2350, 2400, 2450 and 2700 are the same as the processes at the time of starting lever operation shown in FIG. 37, and the processes of steps 2318 to 2330 are different.

After executing the processes of steps 2350, 2400, 2450, 2700 and 2316, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2318 whether or not the battle effect executing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2318, in other words, when the battle effect executing flag is off, in step 2320, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special winning command has been received from the main side. To do.

In the case of Yes in step 2320, in other words, when a special winning command is received from the main side, in step 2322, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is executed for 10 games. Set the command to execute. If the BB is won during the execution of the battle production (victory) (for example, three games after the start of the battle production), the battle production of the fourth and subsequent games scheduled to be executed before the BB winning will be rewritten. For example, in the 4th game, "the main character uses a special move", and in the 5th game, "the enemy character is defeated". Further, if the BB is won in the 10th game from the start of the battle effect (winning), the effect may not be rewritten. In addition, after the bonus ends, the continuation of the battle effect (for example, after the 6th game when the battle effect is won in the 5th game) is not executed, and after the bonus ends, it becomes the "additional specialization state". It may be configured as follows.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2320, in other words, when the special winning command is not received from the main side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the special non-winning command from the main side in step 2324. Determine if it has been done. In the case of Yes in step 2324, in other words, when a special non-winning command is received from the main side, in step 2326, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a battle effect (defeat) over 10 games. ) Is set. If the BB is won during the execution of the battle production (defeat) (for example, 3 games after the start of the battle production), the battle production after the 4th game scheduled to be executed before the BB winning will be rewritten. For example, in the 4th game, "the main character uses a special move", and in the 5th game, "the enemy character is defeated". That is, the battle production that was supposed to be defeated is rewritten so that it becomes a victory. In addition, if the BB is won in the 10th game from the start of the battle production (defeat), "the main character is defeated" in the 10th game, and in the 11th game (when the bet button is operated or the start lever is operated). It may be configured as "the main character is resurrected and wins". In addition, after the bonus ends, the continuation of the battle effect (for example, after the 6th game when the battle effect is won in the 5th game) is not executed, and after the bonus ends, it becomes "AT in progress". It may be configured. If the specialization transition lottery can be executed depending on the winning of the bonus or the winning combination in the bonus, the specialization state may be set after the bonus is completed.

When the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2322 and 2326, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the battle effect executing flag in step 2328. Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined value (10) in the battle effect counter in step 2330, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

By doing so, when either the special winning command or the special non-winning command is transmitted from the main control board M, the battle effect is started. As described above, when the specialized winning command is transmitted from the main control board M, the winning battle effect is executed, and when the specialized non-winning command is transmitted from the main control board M, the defeated battle effect is executed. Will be executed. In this modification, the number of times the battle effect is executed is 10, but it can be any number of times.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2324, in other words, if the special non-winning command is not received from the main side, the CPUSC immediately shifts to the next process (process in step 2110).

If No in step 2318, in other words, if the battle effect execution flag is not off, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts 1 from the battle effect counter value in step 2332.

Next, in step 2334, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the battle effect counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 2334, in other words, when the battle effect counter value is 0, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the battle effect executing flag in step 2336, and the next process (step 2110). Process). On the other hand, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2334, in other words, if the battle effect counter value is a positive value, the CPUSC immediately shifts to the next process (process in step 2110).

By doing so, after the battle effect is started, when the game is executed once, the battle effect counter value is decremented by 1, and when the battle effect counter value becomes 0, the battle effect ends. ..

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a process when the start lever is operated according to the modification example. This process corresponds to FIG. 37 described above. The processes of steps 250 to 2508 are the same as the processes at the time of starting lever operation shown in FIG. 37, and the processes of steps 2510 and 2512 are different.

In the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the battle effect flag is off. Is determined. If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is Yes in step 2510, in other words, if the battle effect flag is off, the process proceeds to step 2508. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2510, in other words, when the battle effect flag is on, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the push order navigation display in step 2512, and the next process (step 2110). Process).

By doing this, even though the battle effect is performed and the push order navigation is executed, if the push order is incorrect at the stage of the first body stop, the push order navigation Can be discontinued.

Next, FIG. 57 is an image of effect execution during AT according to the first modification from the present embodiment. As shown in the upper left of the figure, if the winning-E (watermelon B) is won as a conditional device and a prize is won in the AT state, "GET!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40 and added. It is shown that he was elected. By winning the prize-E, you will win the special status transition lottery and transition to the status shown in the upper center.

As shown in the upper center figure, the battle effect is executed, and the push order navigation is displayed in the second number display mode group. The state related to AT at this time is a "specialization precursor state". Further, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigation is 39 games. The battle effect is performed 10 times, and when the battle effect is completed, the state shifts to the state shown in the upper right figure.

As shown in the upper right figure, it changes to a background image showing that the battle production has been won. As a result, the state related to AT shifts to the "additional specialization state". The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigation is 29 games.

On the other hand, in the stage of the upper left figure, if the winning-E (watermelon B) is not won as a conditional device, the special state transition lottery is not won and the state is shifted to the state of the lower center figure.

As shown in the lower center figure, the battle effect is executed, and the push order navigation is displayed in the first number display mode group. The state related to AT at this time is "AT in progress state". Further, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigation is 39 games. The battle effect is performed 10 times, and when the battle effect is completed, the state shifts to the state shown in the lower right figure.

As shown in the lower right figure, the battle production is defeated and the state remains "AT in progress". The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigation is 29 games. In addition, in the change example 1 from this embodiment, in the "specialization precursor state", the push order navigation is displayed in the second numerical display mode group at 1/2 when the push order navigation occurs, and "AT is in progress". In the "state" and during the battle production, the push order navigation is displayed in the second numerical display mode group at 1/5 when the push order navigation occurs, and the player is executed in the battle production. By counting the number of times the push order navigation is the second number display mode, the battle win, that is, the transition to the "additional specialization state" is expected. It should be noted that the push order navigation, which is the first numerical display mode, can also be displayed during the execution of the battle effect. It should be noted that the above-mentioned "GET!" May not be displayed on the effect display device S40 during the execution of the battle effect. Specifically, if the player is in the "AT state" and the battle effect is not executed, the push order bell is won, and if the reels are stopped in the correct push order, 11 cards are paid out. While "GET!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40, when the "AT in progress" state and the battle effect is being executed, the push order bell is won and the reels are pushed in the correct push order. When stopped, 11 cards are paid out, but "GET!" Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. With this configuration, the player pays more attention to the result of the battle effect without interfering with the display of the battle effect. In addition, the configuration in which the entire screen goes dark when the push order navigation is not followed (the stop button is operated in a push order different from the push order navigation) may be applied to the push order bell. , As an example, if it is "AT in progress" and the battle effect is not executed, the push order bell is won and the reels are stopped in a push order different from the correct push order, the entire screen Is darkened and one payout is made, while in the "AT in progress" state and the battle effect is being executed, the push order bell is won and the reels are pushed in a different push order from the correct push order. If it is stopped, one sheet will be paid out, but the entire screen may be configured so as not to go dark. With this configuration, the player pays more attention to the result of the battle effect without interfering with the display of the battle effect.

With the above configuration, according to the rotating body type game machine according to the change example 1 from the present embodiment, the watermelon B was won in the "AT in progress state" and was not won in the special transition lottery. Even in this case, by configuring the battle effect for 10 games, the player expects to shift to the "additional specialization state" every time the watermelon B is won in the "AT in progress state". It will be embraced and the fun of the game will be improved. In addition, during the execution of the battle effect, the state related to the AT is the "AT in progress state". Even during the execution of the battle effect (defeat), the state related to the AT is the "specialized precursor state". Even during execution, the display of the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 is subtracted each time the game is exhausted. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to determine which state is related to AT during the execution of the battle effect, and the player pays attention to the result of the battle effect.

(Example 2 of change from this embodiment)
In this embodiment, the push order bell is set to 6 choices, the push order replay is set to 3 choices, and the push order of the correct answer can be notified by the push order navigation, but the combination of stopping and displaying is different depending on the push order. The configuration according to the present embodiment is not limited to that of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration relating to a condition device different from the present embodiment in which the combination of stopping and displaying is different depending on the pressing order is referred to as change example 2 from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 58 is an image 6 of an effect during AT according to a second modification from the present embodiment. First, in the second modification from the present embodiment, in the figure, the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won, and the push order navigation is performed in the game in which the push order replay is won. An example of push order navigation with the case where it occurs is shown.

First, on the left side of the figure, "re-game-A", which is a push-order re-game, is won as a conditional device, and the push order of the push-order re-game is 3 choices. Navigating the push order. Further, on the right side of the figure, the push order bell "Winning-A1" is won as the condition device, and the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices. Therefore, the effect display device S40 also has 6 choices of push order. Is navigating. Further, the display mode of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is the same for the push order replay and the push order bell.

However, when the information of only the first stop button is displayed, such as only "left", the player can know that the re-game has been won as the condition device. Since it is a replay, it does not reduce medals, but it cannot increase medals, so

With the above configuration, according to the reel-type game machine according to the change example 2 from the present embodiment, when the push order navigation is displayed at the time of winning the push order re-game, which is 3 choices, 6 choices are used. A situation in which the start lever is operated and the reel is not stopped by configuring the effect display device S40 to display the push order navigation in the same display mode as when the push order navigation is displayed when a certain push order bell is won. Then, it is difficult for the player to judge whether he has won the bell or the re-game, so before stopping the reels, the number of remaining AT games is only subtracted and the game medals do not increase. It is possible to detect something and prevent feeling stress.

In addition, in the change example 2 from this embodiment, when the push order navigation is displayed at the time of winning the push order re-game which is 3 choices, the push order navigation of 6 choices is displayed on the effect display device S40 as in the push order bell. However, the display mode of the push order navigation of the push order replay game and the display mode of the push order navigation of the push order bell in the effect display device S40 may be different from each other. As an example, in the push order navigation related to the push order replay game, the number related to the push order is displayed in the blue circle, and in the push order navigation related to the push bell, the number related to the push order is displayed in the yellow circle. May be configured to be displayed. With such a configuration, in the AT state (a state in which the push order navigation can be displayed), most of the push order navigation displays can be displayed in 6 options, and the player can press which stop button after the second stop. It is possible to prevent the player from not knowing what to do, and to realize a game progress with a good tempo.

<<< Relationship with door opening error >>>
Even if it is detected that the front door DU is opened while the reel M50 is rotating, the reel M50 continues to rotate. Although the reel M50 is in the rotated state, the stop button D40 cannot be operated when the front door DU is open. The lamp of the stop button D40 notifies that the stop button D40 cannot be operated. For example, if it can be operated, the lamp is lit in red, and if it cannot be operated, the lamp is lit in blue. If it can be operated, the lamp may be turned on, and if it cannot be operated, the lamp may be turned off.

Further, when the front door DU is opened while the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M is displaying the push order, information indicating that the front door DU is opened ( (Error display) is displayed on the push order display device D270, and when the front door DU is closed and the door open error is cleared, the push order is displayed on the push order display device D270.

Next, FIG. 59 is an image diagram of a door opening error occurrence. The upper left figure of FIG. 59 is an image diagram showing a state in which the reel M50 is rotating. This state is changed to "re-game-A", which is a push-order re-game, under the condition of "AT in progress" and "RT1" (not limited to this if push-order navigation occurs). I have won. The first number display mode group is displayed on the effect display device S40, "= 1" is displayed on the push order display device D270, and the display is displayed as a push order navigation display corresponding to "left → middle → right". Has been done. Further, in this state, since the operation of the stop button is effective, it is lit in red.

The figure shown in the lower center of FIG. 59 is an image diagram showing a state in which the front door DU is opened while the reel M50 is rotating. When the front door DU is opened, the effect display device S40 displays that the front door DU is being opened (that a door opening error is occurring), and the stop button is disabled and is blue. It is lit at. Further, the push order display device D270 displays "DE" as a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred, and the reel M50 is maintained in a rotated state.

The figure shown in the upper right of FIG. 59 is an image diagram showing a state in which the opened front door DU is closed. Since the front door DU is closed, the door opening error is resolved, and the push order navigation is displayed again on the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270. In addition, since the reel M50 was maintained in a rotated state, it has already reached a constant speed, so acceleration processing until the constant speed is reached becomes unnecessary, and the stop button is effective immediately after closing the front door DU. And lights up in red. The color and notification mode of the stop button lamp may be changed, such as (1) stop button enabled = green, stop button disabled = red, (2) stop button enabled = on, stop button disabled = off, etc. It may be configured as follows.

If the specifications allow the game to be played (the stop button can be operated) even when the front door DU is open while the push order navigation is being displayed on the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40 Displays a message such as "door is open", outputs voice such as "door is open" from speaker S20, and continuously displays push order navigation on push order display device D270. As a result, the game can be advanced according to the push order navigation while notifying that the front door DU is open.

Further, not only the push-order navigation is displayed on the push-order display device D270, but also the stop button to be stopped next among the stop buttons D41, D42, and D43 may be lit in red (the other stop buttons are blue). Lights up with).

Further, if the specifications are such that the game can be played even if an error that can be canceled occurs while the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270, the following can be done. Note that the releaseable error includes a medal detection error that can be output when a game medal is detected with the blocker D100 turned off (a state in which the medal flow path is not formed).

First, a message related to an error such as "Please check ..." is displayed on the effect display device S40, a sound indicating the occurrence of an error such as "boo-boo" is output from the speaker S20, and further, a push order display device is displayed. The push order navigation is continuously displayed on the D270. In this case, when the front door DU is also opened, a voice such as "the door is open" is output from the speaker S20 at the same time. By continuously displaying the push order navigation, even if a releaseable error occurs or the front door DU is opened, the game can be advanced according to the push order navigation while notifying that fact.

Further, it may be after the third stop (the timing when the stop button for the third stop is pressed (or the timing after the press)), or the timing when the stop button for the third stop is released (or released). An error code indicating a cancelable error is displayed on the push order display device D270 at a later timing).

Furthermore, when the power is turned off and then turned on again while the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270, "display of push order display device D270 → constant speed operation of reel → voice The output is restored in the order of "output-> display of effect display device S40".

Next, FIG. 60 is an operation diagram showing an example of lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator of the rotating cylinder type game machine according to this example. In the figure, in two consecutive games of the first game and the second game, the game section which was the "normal section" in the first game is set to the "advantageous section" in the second game. (For example, in the first game, the state related to AT is the "AT precursor state", and from the second game, the state related to AT shifts to the "AT in progress state"). The game is progressing in chronological order from the left side to the right side. In this example, the timing at which the advantageous section indicator YH starts lighting is the next game from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated (that is, the timing of 1) in the first game (normal section). In the two games, any timing is set before the wait state ends and the game medal can be inserted (that is, the timing of 7). When the re-game is stopped and displayed, the operation of the start lever D50 related to the second game, which is the next game, is started from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated (that is, the timing of 1) in the first game. By the time when is effective, the advantageous section indicator YH will be turned on. Further, within this section, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator is not limited, but for example, the timing at which the reel M50 starts rotating after the operation of the start lever D50 (that is, the timing of 2), or any stop. Button D40 is the timing when the first stop operation is performed (that is, the timing of 3), one of the stop buttons D40 is the timing when the second stop operation is performed (that is, the timing of 4), and any stop button D40 is The advantageous section indicator is turned on at the timing when the third stop operation is performed (that is, the timing of 5) or the timing when the payout of the game medal is started (that is, the timing of 6) due to the winning of a small winning combination or the like. May be.

If the specifications allow the game to be played (the stop button can be operated) even when the front door DU is open while the push order navigation is being displayed on the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40 Displays a message such as "door is open", outputs voice such as "door is open" from speaker S20, and continuously displays push order navigation on push order display device D270. As a result, the game can be advanced according to the push order navigation while notifying that the front door DU is open.

Further, not only the push-order navigation is displayed on the push-order display device D270, but also the stop button to be stopped next among the stop buttons D41, D42, and D43 may be lit in red (the other stop buttons are blue). Lights up with).

Further, if the specifications are such that the game can be played even if an error that can be canceled occurs while the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270, the following can be done. Note that the releaseable error includes a medal detection error that can be output when a game medal is detected with the blocker D100 turned off (a state in which the medal flow path is not formed).

First, a message related to an error such as "Please check ..." is displayed on the effect display device S40, a sound indicating the occurrence of an error such as "boo-boo" is output from the speaker S20, and further, a push order display device is displayed. The push order navigation is continuously displayed on the D270. In this case, when the front door DU is also opened, a voice such as "the door is open" is output from the speaker S20 at the same time. By continuously displaying the push order navigation, even if a releaseable error occurs or the front door DU is opened, the game can be advanced according to the push order navigation while notifying that fact.

Further, after the third stop, an error code indicating a releaseable error is displayed on the push order display device D270.

Furthermore, when the power is turned off and then turned on again while the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270, "display of push order display device D270 → constant speed operation of reel → voice The output is restored in the order of "output-> display of effect display device S40".

<<< Example of game state transition diagram >>
FIG. 61 is a schematic view showing an example of the configuration of the game state transition diagram applicable to this example. The game section has two types, a "normal section" and an "advantageous section".

In the normal section, the BR probability, which is the combined winning probability of BB (big bonus) and RB (regular bonus), is 1/1400. In addition, the ratio of winning BB and RB when winning BR is 1: 5. In addition, it is configured to digest about 32 games per 1000 yen.

By winning BB or RB in the "normal section", it shifts to "in BB or RB" in the figure. As a result, the "normal section" is set to the "advantageous section". Further, when the execution of BB or RB is completed, the process shifts to "RT2". Here, in "RT2", the BR probability, which is the combined winning probability of BB and RB, is 1/50, which is higher than the BR probability of the normal section. Therefore, "RT2" is in a relatively advantageous state. In addition, the ratio of winning BB and RB when winning BR in "RT2" is 1: 5. Further, "RT2" has a finite number of 50 games, and if the player stays for 50 games and cannot win the BB or RB, the "normal section" is set. In addition, the probability of winning BB or RB in the case of "RT2" (probability of winning 1/50 BR in 50 games) is about 65%, and if you win BB or RB again In order to shift to "RT2", the consecutive villas are configured to continue in a 65% loop. In addition, as another route for staying in a row, by winning a special replay that is a replay that triggers the transition of the RT state in the "normal section", it is possible to shift to the advantageous section "RT1". It becomes. In "RT1", the BR probability, which is the combined winning probability of BB and RB, is 1/50, which is higher than the BR probability of the normal section (similar to RT2). For this reason, "RT1" is in a relatively advantageous state, but the ratio of winning BB and RB when winning BR in "RT1" is 1: 8, and "RT1" is Since there are a limited number of 16 games, "RT2" is more advantageous to the player than "RT1". If the player stays in "RT1" for 16 games and cannot win the BB or RB, he / she will shift to the "normal section". When the game staying in any of the "advantageous sections" "RT1", "RT2", "BB or RB" continues for 400 games (there is no passage through the "normal section"). Or, when an arbitrary end condition (for example, 50 games have passed without winning BB or RB in "RT2") is satisfied, the "advantageous section" is set to the "normal section". Further, when setting from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", the information regarding the "advantageous section" is initialized.

The configuration in the figure may be changed as appropriate, and the configuration may be as follows. Further, the following configurations may be applied individually or a plurality of configurations may be combined.
(1) The setting from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section" is set by winning a lottery according to the advantageous section transition lottery probability defined in the condition device.
(2) In the "advantageous section", the winning rate of BB or RB can be changed for each state. The state may be an RT state or a state related to AT.
(3) If a game staying in any of the "advantageous sections" continues a predetermined game (for example, 400 games) (does not go through the "normal section" between them), it is set to the "normal section". At the same time, the information about the "advantageous section" is initialized.

Further, as the RT state that becomes the "advantageous section", "RT3" that has the same BR probability as the "normal section" may be provided, and if such a configuration is made, the winning rate of the re-game in "RT3" Is designed to be higher than the "normal section" so that the number of medals held does not decrease even if the BR is not won (for example, an average of -0.1 medals per game), and the BR for 50 games in "RT2" If the winner is not won, the game may be configured to shift from "RT2" to "RT3". If you can win the BR again in "RT3", you will move to "RT2" after the BR ends, and if you cannot win the BR in "RT3" and 50 games have passed, you will be in the "normal section". It may be configured to be set.

<Other changes>
In this example, the player has a first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning a prize, and a second BB combination in which the second BB, which is less profitable for the player than the first BB, is executed by winning the prize. It may be configured, and further, it may be configured so that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be won in duplicate (providing the combination of "first BB + second BB"). With such a configuration, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the highly profitable execution of the 1st BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB is completed, the first The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be stopped and displayed (the fact that the second BB has been won is carried over even during the execution of the first BB). In addition, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, by executing the highly profitable 1st BB first, for example, in the situation where the closing time of the amusement park is approaching, the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won. In that case, the low-profit second BB is executed first, the amusement park is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the high-profit first BB cannot be executed and the game must be ended. Can be prevented.

Immediately after the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be notified, or the winning of the second BB may be notified immediately (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notification). If this is the case, the probability of winning the re-game may be increased during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Further, when it is hidden, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive villa chance time !!"). .. In such a configuration, if the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, it will be definite that the effect is generated = the second BB is won, so only the first BB is won. However, it is preferable that the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is executed even after the operation of the first BB is completed (the effect mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above. , For example, "BB Renso Chance Time !!" is displayed on the production display device S40). Further, even when only the first BB is won and the first BB is won again after the operation of the first BB is completed, the execution of the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. You may. In addition, it may be configured to notify the winner of the first BB once after notifying the winner of the second BB (for example, the display of "BB consecutive villa chance time !!" → the display of "sorry" → the "first". 1BB is being won !! ”etc.). Further, when the second BB is hidden after the operation of the first BB is completed due to the duplicate winning during the AT, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared (after the return, the effect is on the effect). (Reducing the number of remaining games, etc.), but the internal reduction of the number of remaining games, etc. may be continuously suspended. When the first BB and the second BB are won in duplicate, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small winning combination A are elected in duplicate, the first BB is prioritized for stop control.
(2) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are elected in duplicate, the small winning combination B is prioritized for stop control.
That is, a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control over the BB combination and a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control of the BB combination may be provided.
(3) When the first BB and the small winning combination A are won in duplicate, when the small winning combination A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination A (for example, at the time of the first stop, the first 2 When stopped), a notification corresponding to the small winning combination A (notification so that the small winning combination A can win a prize) is performed.
That is, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is to notify the first BB combination that normally gives priority to the stop control over the small combination A. Therefore, when the first BB combination cannot win a prize regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (the small combination A can win a prize), the notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. In addition, when the small winning combination A wins as a result of the game, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination A is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player according to various game situations that change in the middle of the game, and the content notified by the effect display device S40 or the like and the actual content. It is possible to prevent the winning roles from being inconsistent.
(4) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are won in duplicate, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination B is performed during the rotation of all reels.

Further, it may be configured to have a display (7-segment or the like) for displaying the number of the stop-displayed symbol (or symbol combination) controlled by the main control board M. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradiction effect that does not correspond to the stopped displayed symbol (or symbol combination). For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the effective line, an effect that is likely to be output when the watermelon is won (for example, lighting the lamp in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided and has the following features.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by using the sub input button of the game machine.
(2) Even when playing a game using the earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the game machine at a predetermined volume (for example, it is output from a speaker provided in the game machine). ).
(3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

Further, during the AT state or the BB execution, the effect sound may be output from the game machine even when the game is played using the earphone jack. Further, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even if the earphone is pulled out, the volume for when using the earphone jack may not be cleared (initial value) immediately. For example, when there is no operation for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (default value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the volume for when using the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided in a place that does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted in the earphone jack, the earphone cord does not get entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever. ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the re-game combination can be changed between after the end of BB when the number of acquisitions is more than a specific number and after the end of BB when the number of acquisitions is less than a specific number. It may be configured.
(2) There may be a plurality of RT states that shift when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after the end of "RT1", or may be configured to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state).
(3) The RT state is changed when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the transition of the RT state is not made to have a one-to-one correspondence with the winning, and the transition is made with a certain probability regardless of the conditional device and the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game).
(4) Equipped with 0 RT transitions, duplicate winning of 0-card combination, and duplicate winning of 0-card combination. That is, no matter which push order is stopped, no matter what position the stop operation is performed, a 0-card combination is provided, which is a combination in which one or more combinations do not win, and the RT state shifts by winning the 0-card combination. It may be configured to enable the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination and the 7-card combination or the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination A and the 0-card combination B. When the 0-card combination is won in duplicate, either the 0-card combination that shifts to RT or the 0-card combination that does not shift to RT may be won depending on the pushing order. It is also possible to win the 0-card combination and the BB combination in duplicate, and give priority to the 0-card combination to win the prize.

As in this example, the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices ("left → middle → right", "left → right → middle", "middle → left → right", "middle → right → left", 6 choices of "right → left → middle" and "right → middle → left"), and the push order of the push order re-game is configured to be 3 choices (the first stop is 3 choices of left, middle, and right). If this is the case, the push order display on the push order display device D270 differs between the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay, in other words, 6-choice push order navigation. The display and the three-choice push order navigation display may be configured to be different. As an example, as the push order display related to 6 choices, "= 1" in the case of "left → middle → right", "= 2" in the case of "left → right → middle", "middle → left →" "= 3" for "right", "= 4" for "middle → right → left", "= 5" for "right → left → middle", "right → middle → left" In the case of, it is displayed as "= 6", and as the push order display related to the three choices, "= 7" when the first stop is on the left and "= 8" when the first stop is in the middle. , When the first stop is on the right, it may be configured to be displayed as "= 9".

In this example, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the "AT in progress state", "specialized precursor state", or "additional specialized state", is configured to be displayable on the effect display device, and AT is configured. If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the game shifts from "AT in progress" to "normal game state" and then wins the AT lottery again within a specific game and shifts to "AT in progress", the previous AT While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), so that the "AT in progress state" is changed to the "normal game state" and then again within a specific game. If the AT lottery is won and the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", the number of AT digestion games is not taken over from the previous number of AT digestion games, and the number of AT digestion games is newly counted from 0 games.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts rotating, a display prompting the reel to be stopped on the effect display device S40 (for example, "reel" If you do not operate the stop button for a predetermined time after the reel starts rotating in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, (2-1) effect The display areas of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 and the display prompting to stop the reel do not overlap, and (2-2) the display prompting to stop the reel is not displayed.
(3) When the power is set to "ON → OFF → ON" in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, the rotation speed of the reel becomes a constant speed and before the operation of the stop button becomes effective. The push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing of.
(4) The state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT are the states related to the AT in which the push order navigation occurs differently in the game in which the common bell is won, or the push order navigation can occur. The frequency of push-order navigation in the game in which the common bell is won differs between the state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT, which is a state related to AT in which push-order navigation can occur.
(5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example), which has the highest probability of winning a replay, the percentage of games in which push-order navigation occurs is higher than the percentage of games in which push-order navigation does not occur. high. For example, the total winning rate of the bell role and the replay role is 1/2 or more. With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting bored during AT.
It may be configured as described above.

Here, the feature points of the above-mentioned game section will be described in detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The transition lottery to the "advantageous section" can be executed except during the internal winning of the BB and the execution of the BB.

≪Waiting section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for transition to the "advantageous section" is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the "standby state", it becomes the "advantageous section" from the next game.

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) The push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) relating to a condition device in which a player's profit margin differs depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" (for example, shifting from a "high probability state" to a "AT in progress state" as a state related to AT), a lottery for adding the number of AT games, and the like can be executed.
(5) In the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) Advantageous section When the counter value of the remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the "advantageous section" is basically the "advantageous section" unless BB or push order navigation is executed once or more in the "advantageous section". The exception is that if the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and push order navigation will be performed once in the "advantageous section". Is configured so that the "advantageous section" can be terminated even if it is not executed.
(7) Advantageous section remaining game counter The measurement of YKc-1 is executed in all games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the counter value is added for each game even during BB execution).

Here, the feature points related to the lottery for setting the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) Whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery, and whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is not determined as the number of games elapses.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) When a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different.
(4) The performance of the "advantageous section" does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the "high probability state", and the setting 6 shifts to the "AT in progress state". Etc., it does not differ depending on the set value).
(5) Setting to "advantageous section" If you win the lottery, it will basically be "advantageous section" from the next game (setting to "advantageous section" by the BB role established in "normal section" If you win the lottery, you can set it as a "waiting section" in the next game).

Here, the feature points related to the change in the performance of the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" with reference to the set value is not executed (as a condition common to all set values, a predetermined number of games may have passed and a predetermined condition device may be established). ..
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(3) When the BB is internally elected, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(4) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(5) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Can be executed. A lottery for adding the number of AT games can also be executed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example. Further, the following configurations may be applied individually or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1-1) After lottery of various combinations is performed by the main control means (main control board), AT lottery is performed based on one information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result, but no winning (complete loss). In the case of), the AT lottery is not always performed.
(1-2) In the AT lottery, there is a promotion (low probability → high probability) lottery in the AT lottery state. In that case, the above (1-1) is applied, but the AT lottery state is demoted (1-2). When a lottery is performed (high probability → low probability), the above (1-1) does not apply (lottery is possible even if the lottery is completely lost).
(A) When the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) is determined by the number of games, (1-1) is not applied to the number of games lottery.
Example 1: The number of games is randomly changed even with the same combination of condition devices.
Example 2: After winning the promotion lottery in the AT lottery state, a lottery for the number of games is performed separately based on the result of the role lottery (including loss) in the next game and thereafter.
(B) The method of determining the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) by the number of games and the method of performing the demotion lottery in the AT lottery state are used together (shift to the demotion lottery after the so-called guarantee period).
(1-3) There is an AT state promotion lottery (non-AT → AT) in the AT lottery, and the above (1-1) is applied in that case as well, but the AT state demotion (AT → non-AT). AT) When a lottery is conducted, the above (1-1) does not apply (a lottery is possible even if the lottery is completely lost).
(1-4) In the AT lottery, there is a promotion (low probability → high probability) lottery of the transition lottery state to the specialized AT, in which case (1-1) above is applied, but Transition to specialized AT When a lottery for demotion of the lottery state (high probability → low probability) is performed, (1-1) does not apply (lottery is possible even if the lottery is completely lost).
(1-5) There is a promotion lottery to specialized AT (AT → specialized AT) in the AT lottery, and (1-1) is also applied in that case, but the AT state is demoted (special). In the case of a modified AT → AT) lottery, the above (1-1) does not apply (lottery is possible even if the lottery is completely lost).
In addition, if there is a grace period (so-called latent / precursor game) until the state transition after winning the AT lottery (any of (1-2) to (1-5)), the grace period can be determined by ( 1-1) does not apply.

<< Point 2 >>
(2-1) After the lottery of various combinations is performed by the main control means, the AT lottery is performed based on one piece of information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result. is there.
(2-2) Information about the AT can be transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means at the lottery trigger (when the start lever is ON) in (2-1).
(2-3) The information that can be transmitted in (2-2) includes at least the AT state type in the game and the AT state type in the next game.
(2-4) The sub-control means determines and executes a series of production contents corresponding to the game including the AT state transition notification based on the information of (2-3) transmitted in (2-2). To do.
(2-5) The main control means does not output information about AT as an outer end signal / test signal at the lottery trigger in (2-1).
After the end of the game, only the AT state type determined by the main control means is output.

<< Point 3 >>
(3-1) When the main control means is in the AT state (AT, specialized AT), if the number of payouts and / or the small winning combination whose RT state changes depending on the push order is won, the main control means is used for a specific display. The information that can specify the push order that is most advantageous for the player is displayed, but if the small win is not won (missing, small win regardless of push order, reverse push 7 set replay that does not change the RT state, Etc.), nothing is displayed.
(3-2) When the sub-control means is in the AT state (AT, specialized AT), the number of continuous remaining games in the AT state (hereinafter, the number of remaining AT games) and the total number of games consumed in the AT state (AT) Below, it is possible to display the total number of AT games * the total net increase in number may be displayed).
(3-3) The number of AT remaining games is updated based on the number of continuous remaining games in the AT state transmitted from the main control means for each game, but the total number of AT games is updated by the main control means for each game. It is updated based on the AT status type sent from.
Based on the story of the advantageous section, the total number of AT games (including the total net increase) is cleared when AT → non-AT.
(3-4) The number of remaining AT games can be hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state, but the total number of AT games is not hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state. ..
The battle production state before the end of the AT state, the specialized AT state, etc. are assumed.
(3-5) The number of AT remaining games is not displayed to exceed the number of continuous remaining games in the AT state transmitted from the main control means, but can be displayed to be less than that.

<< Point 4 >>
(4-1) There is a case where a specific display mode controlled by the main control means is displayed in a specific display mode (example: "= 1" is used to display a 6-select bell forward monitor).
(4-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (example: "= 1"), an operation instruction image (example: 1, 2, 3) is displayed on the image display.
(4-3) When the operation according to the instruction is performed, a series of effect images A (eg, 1, 2, and 3 are sequentially erased, and the effect image showing the correct answer in the pressing order is displayed on the image display. Example: Image of defeating an enemy))) is displayed.
(4-4) If the operation according to the instruction is not performed, when it is confirmed that the operation according to the instruction is not performed, the effect image A to the effect image B (example: all the operation instruction images are deleted, and the push order is incorrect. Switch to the production image shown (example: image attacked by the enemy).
(4-5) In the case of (4-3), when a small winning combination (example: 9 small winning combination when the 6-choice bell is correct) wins, a winning notification image (example: GET) is displayed on the image display. However, in the case of (4-4), even if a small winning combination (example: one small winning combination when the 6-choice bell is incorrect) is won, the winning notification image (example: GET) is not displayed on the image display.
(4-6) Even in the case of (4-4), when the game ends, information on AT (eg, the number of additional games) may be displayed.
(4-7) When a predetermined error (door error, etc.) occurs while a specific display mode (example: "= 1") and an operation instruction image (example: 1, 2, 3) are displayed. , The display is maintained in a specific display mode, but the operation instruction image is hidden.
The main control means is assumed to display an error on a separate display.
(4-8) An effect that prompts the operation of the sub button when nothing is displayed on the specific display than when the display is performed in a specific display mode (example: "= 1") (sub button operation). (Additional production required) is likely to occur.

<< Point 5 >>
(5-1) There is a case where a specific display mode controlled by the main control means is displayed in a specific display mode (example: “= 1” indicates a forward push monitor display of a 6-choice bell).
(5-2) When displaying the first effect image (example: 1, 2, 3 pressing order + AT image) on the image display when displaying in a specific display mode (example: "= 1"). And, there is a case where the second effect image (example: push order of 1, 2, and 3 + an image during specialized AT or when an additional final effect occurs) is displayed.
(5-3) It is highly expected that the period of stay in the AT state will be extended when the second effect image is displayed than when the first effect image is displayed.
(5-4) In a game prior to the game displaying the second effect image, it is possible to execute a precursor effect suggesting the display of the second effect image.
(5-5) The second effect image (and precursor effect) is not displayed when the number of AT remaining games is less than a predetermined value (example: in the battle effect state, LAST? Game display).

<< Point 6 >>
(6-1) There is a case where a specific display mode (example: "= 1") is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means.
(6-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (example: "= 1"), a case of displaying in the first display mode (example: 1, 2, 3) on the image display and a case of displaying in the second display mode (Example: → (arrow symbol)) may be displayed.
(6-3) The first display mode (example: 1, 2, 3) is a display mode in which the push order composed of numbers can be specified, and the second display mode (example: → (arrow symbol)) is. This is a display mode in which the push order composed of numbers other than numbers can be specified.
(6-4) The degree of expectation that the period of stay in the AT state is extended differs between the display of the first display mode and the display of the second display mode.
Even when the second display mode is displayed, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation at point 4 is followed.

<< Point 7 >>
(7-1) The first lottery result in which the number of payouts differs depending on the push order (example: the correct answer push order is left → middle → right push order bell) and the second lottery result in which the number of payouts is the same regardless of the push order (example) : Common bell) is provided.
(7-2) The benefits related to the instruction function differ between when the first lottery result is determined and when the second lottery result is determined (example: AT addition ... 1st lottery result> 2nd Lottery result).
(7-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game, a specific display mode (example: "= 1") is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means, and an image is displayed. It is also displayed on the vessel in a display mode in which the push order can be specified.
(7-4) When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, the push order may be displayed on the image display.
(7-5) When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, the degree of expectation that the stay period of the notification game will be extended differs depending on whether the push order is displayed on the image display or not. * During the notification game, when the second lottery result is determined, the push order is displayed on the image display, and if the push order is not followed, the basic operation of point 4 is followed.

<< Point 8 >>
(8-1) The first lottery result is a lottery result in which the number of payouts differs depending on the pushing order.
(8-2) When the first lottery result is determined inside the bonus, the reels are stopped and controlled so that the number of payouts is the same regardless of the pushing order.
(8-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game and inside the bonus, a specific display mode (example: "= 1") is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means. ) Is displayed, and the image display is also displayed in a display mode in which the pressing order can be specified.
(8-4) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game and inside the non-bonus, and when the first lottery result is determined during the notification game and inside the bonus. Then, the same specific display mode (example: "= 1") is displayed on the specific display, but the push order display of different modes may be displayed on the image display (example: in the former, 1. 2.3, in the latter, → (arrow symbol)).
In the latter case, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation at point 4 is followed.
(8-5) In the case of (8-3), if the effect of winning the bonus is displayed in the previous game, the display is deleted.
(8-6) Information about AT (example: number of additional games) cannot be displayed during the notification game and inside the bonus.
If the addition is confirmed but the additional amount has not been notified, the notification will be postponed until after the bonus is removed (during the bonus game, after the bonus ends).

<< Point 9 >>
(9-1) The first lottery result in which the degree of advantage changes depending on the push order (example: push order replay in which the first stop maintains a high RT on the left) and the second lottery result in which the degree of advantage does not change depending on the push order (example) Example: Special replay).
(9-2) When the second lottery result is decided, a game that notifies the push order in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (example: when the addition of AT is decided (is) or special zone (When it is decided (or is) to shift to), and a game in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed and the push order is not notified.
(9-3) When a specific symbol combination notifies the push order that can be stopped and displayed, the push order is not notified to the specific display controlled by the main control means, and the image controlled by the sub control means. The display notifies the pressing order.
(9-4) When the second lottery result is determined and the notification of the push order in which the specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (hereinafter, reverse push 7 notification) is performed, the specific symbol combination (example: 7 replays) is prepared. Even if there is no (even if there is a mistake in pressing), information about AT (eg, the number of additional games) may be displayed at the end of the game.
(9-5) When the second lottery result is determined and the reverse push 7 notification is not performed, even if a specific symbol combination (example: 777 replay) is prepared, information about AT (example: additional game) at the end of the game. Number) is not displayed.
(9-6) When the first lottery result is determined, the reverse push 7 notification is not displayed, but when the third lottery result (normal replay without push order) is determined, the reverse push 7 notification is displayed. Can be displayed.
(9-7) Even if the operation according to the reverse push 7 notification is not performed (when the reverse push is not performed or 7 is not stopped at the first stop), the reverse push 7 notification can be maintained. ..

<< Point 10 >>
(10-1) The first lottery result in which the degree of advantage changes depending on the push order (example: push order replay in which the first stop maintains a high RT on the left) and the second lottery result in which the degree of advantage does not change depending on the push order (example) Example: Special replay).
(10-2) The second lottery result has a higher probability of winning in the second RT (high RT that is likely to stay during the notification game) than in the first RT.
(10-3) When the second lottery result is decided, a game that notifies the push order in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (example: when the addition of AT is decided (is) or special zone (When it is decided (or is) to shift to), and a game in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed and the push order is not notified.
(10-4) When the second lottery result is determined after the notification game is completed and before the fall from the second RT to the first RT, the specific symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed. Is notified.
In the case of (10-5) and (10-4), it is confirmed that the AT lottery will not be performed after the notification game is completed and before the fall from the second RT to the first RT. Even if (example: 777 replays) are complete, information about AT (example: number of additional games) is not displayed at the end of the game.
(10-6) When the first lottery result is decided, the same effect as in the case of (10-4) is not displayed, but when the third lottery result (normal replay without push order) is decided. Can display the same effect as in the case of (10-4).

<< Point 11 >>
(11-1) Correct answer of push order small combination (or replay) The push order is 6 choices, and the image display is notified of the operation order from the first stop to the third stop at the time of the notification game.
(11-2) Correct answer of push order replay (or small winning combination) There are three push orders, but the image display is notified of the operation order from the first stop to the third stop during the notification game.
(11-3) In the case of (11-1) and the case of (11-2), the display mode when notifying the operation order on the image display is the same (in terms of color, shape, etc., the winning combination). Does not notify).
In the case of (11-2), assuming that the operation according to the push order is not performed, there are two ways of correct answer for 3 choices and incorrect answer for the remaining push order or incorrect answer for 3 choices. It works.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation (superimposition) of these listed concepts, but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (1) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
A main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information, and
A sub-information display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) connected to the main game unit is provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to control the notification state,
Under the situation controlled by the notification state, at least in the game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is mainly used. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A sub-information display control means for controlling the display of the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is provided.
An operation mode in which information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) in the game in which the predetermined combination is won. Notification control can be executed,
When the operation mode notification control is executed, information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed in the first display mode, and the first display mode. In the second display mode, which is different from the display mode of the above, there is a case where information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. ,
When the operation mode notification control is executed when a specific condition is satisfied, a stop switch (for example, stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in the second display mode rather than the first display mode. It is a rotating cylinder type gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that information that can identify the operation mode of the above is easily displayed.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (2) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
A main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information, and
A sub-information display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) connected to the main game unit is provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to control the notification state,
Under the situation controlled by the notification state, at least in the game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is mainly used. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A sub-information display control means for controlling the display of the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is provided.
An operation mode in which information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) in the game in which the predetermined combination is won. Notification control can be executed,
When the operation mode notification control is executed, information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed in the first display mode, and the first display mode. In the second display mode, which is different from the display mode of the above, there is a case where information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. ,
Rather than displaying information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in the first display mode, the predetermined combination is displayed in the second display mode. When displaying information that can identify the operation mode of the corresponding stop switch (for example, the stop button D40), the expectation that the privilege is given to the player is higher.
Information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in the first display mode when the operation mode notification control is executed when a specific condition is satisfied. However, in the second display mode, there is no case where information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. It is a rotating body type game machine characterized by being.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (3) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
A main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information, and
A sub-information display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) connected to the main game unit is provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to control the notification state,
Under the situation controlled by the notification state, at least in the game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is mainly used. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A sub-information display control means for controlling the display of the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is provided.
An operation mode in which information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) in the game in which the predetermined combination is won. Notification control can be executed,
When the operation mode notification control is executed, information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed in the first display mode, and the first display mode. In the second display mode, which is different from the display mode of the above, there is a case where information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. ,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the operation mode of each stop switch (for example, stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40) is individually specified.
The second display mode is a display mode for integrating and specifying the operation mode of each stop switch (for example, stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40). It is a body-type game machine.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (4) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
A main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information, and
A sub-information display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) and a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) connected to the main game unit are provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to control the notification state,
Under the situation controlled by the notification state, at least in the game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is mainly used. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A sub-information display control means for controlling the display of the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is provided.
An operation mode in which information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) in the game in which the predetermined combination is won. Notification control can be executed,
When the operation mode notification control is executed, information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed in the first display mode, and the first display mode. In the second display mode, which is different from the display mode of the above, there is a case where information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. ,
When displaying information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in the first display mode, the displayed stop switch (for example, stop button D40) It is a rotating cylinder type gaming machine characterized in that when the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode, the displayed information is hidden. ..

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (5) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
It is equipped with an information output unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of outputting information.
In a game in which a predetermined combination is won by a combination lottery means for performing a combination lottery, when the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in the first operation mode, a symbol combination in which the first profit is given is given. Can be displayed while
In the game in which the predetermined combination is won, when the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in the second operation mode, the symbol combination to which the second benefit is given can be displayed. Ori,
In the game in which the predetermined combination is won, the information output unit (for example, the effect display device S40) can output the notification information in response to the display of the symbol combination to which the first benefit is given. so,
In the game in which the predetermined combination is won, even if the symbol combination to which the second benefit is given is displayed, the information output unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is configured not to output the notification information. It is a rotating body type game machine characterized by.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (6) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
A main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information, and
A sub-information display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) and a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) connected to the main game unit are provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
In the game in which the first predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the profit given in the game may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40).
In a game in which a second predetermined combination different from the first predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the profit given in the game is the same regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A sub-information display control means for controlling the display of the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is provided.
In the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the first predetermined combination is displayed on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270). ), And information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the first predetermined combination can be displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40).
In the game in which the second predetermined combination is won, the information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is not displayed on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270), while the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is not displayed. , The rotating cylinder type gaming machine, characterized in that information regarding the operation mode of the stop button D40) can be displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40).

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (7) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
A main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information, and
A sub-information display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) and a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) connected to the main game unit are provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
After the special combination is won by the combination lottery means, if the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed, it is possible to control the special game state.
In the case of a normal game section until the special combination is won by the combination lottery means, in the game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the game depends on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40). While the benefits granted in can vary
In the case of an internal winning section until the special combination is won by the combination lottery means and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed, the stop switch (for example, in the game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means) , Regardless of the operation mode of the stop button D40), the benefits given in the game are the same.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A sub-information display control means for controlling the display of the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is provided.
In the game in which the predetermined combination is won, regardless of whether it is the normal game section or the internal winning section, the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination Information that can specify the operation mode can be displayed on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270), and the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination can be specified. Is a rotating cylinder type gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed on a sub-information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40).

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (8) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
A main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information, and
A sub-information display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) and a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) connected to the main game unit are provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
In a game in which a predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the displayed symbol combination may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40), while the symbol combination displayed depends on the mode of the displayed symbol combination. It is configured so that the game state after the game does not change.
In the game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, when the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in a predetermined operation mode, a specific symbol combination can be displayed.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A sub-information display control means for controlling the display of the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is provided.
In the game in which the predetermined operation mode is won, the information that can specify the predetermined operation mode is substituting without displaying the information that can specify the predetermined operation mode on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270). When displaying on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40), and when the information that can specify the predetermined operation mode is displayed on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270), the sub information display unit (for example, for example) The rotating cylinder type game machine is characterized in that it is not displayed on the effect display device S40) and is configured to have.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (9) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
A main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information, and
A sub-information display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) and a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) connected to the main game unit are provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with a main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270).
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to control the notification state,
Under the situation controlled by the notification state, the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the first predetermined combination can be specified at least in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means. Information can be displayed on the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270).
In the game in which the second predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the displayed symbol combination may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40), while the displayed symbol combination mode may differ. It is configured so that the game state after the game does not change.
In the game in which the second predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, when the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in a predetermined operation mode, the predetermined symbol combination can be displayed.
In the game in which the second predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, when the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in a specific operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode, the predetermined symbol The combination is configured to be invisible and
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A sub-information display control means for controlling the display of the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is provided.
In the game in which the second predetermined combination is won, the predetermined operation mode is performed without displaying the information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270). When the identifiable information is displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40), and the information on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is displayed on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270). ), The information that can specify the specific operation mode is displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40), and the rotating cylinder type is configured to have. It is a game machine.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (10) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
It is equipped with an information output unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of outputting information.
In a game in which a predetermined combination is won by a combination lottery means for performing a combination lottery, some stop switches (for example, stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40) are operated in a predetermined operation mode. At that point, it is certain that the specified symbol combination will be displayed.
In a game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means for performing the combination lottery, some of the stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) have the predetermined operation mode. It is configured so that it is certain that the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed when the operation is not performed.
In the game in which the predetermined combination is won, the information output unit (for example, information that can identify the predetermined operation mode regarding a part of the stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, the stop button D40)) For example, information that can be output by the effect display device S40) and can specify the operation mode of the remaining stop switches (for example, stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40) is also information output unit (for example). For example, it is a rotating cylinder type game machine characterized in that it can be output by the effect display device S40).

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (11) is
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) connected to the main game unit is provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with an information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
Winning information is determined according to the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means,
If the determined winning information is winning information including a special role, it is possible to derive the small winning combination winning information of the small winning combination that was simultaneously won with the special winning combination based on the winning information.
It is configured so that the production group information corresponding to the small winning combination winning information can be derived and transmitted to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
It is characterized in that the effect group information corresponding to a certain small combination winning information and the effect group information corresponding to another small combination winning information can be derived as the same information. It is a type game machine.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (12) is
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) connected to the main game unit is provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with an information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
Winning information is determined according to the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means,
Based on the winning information, it is possible to derive different small winning combination / replaying combination winning information depending on the type of small winning combination or replaying combination.
It is configured so that the production group information corresponding to the small combination / re-game combination winning information can be derived and transmitted to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
It has a conversion table for converting the small combination / replay combination winning information into the effect group information, and the effect group information is stored in the conversion table.
The rotating cylinder type is configured so that the effect group information can be acquired from the conversion table by using a specific address as a reference address and the information corresponding to the small combination / replay combination winning information as an offset value. It is a game machine.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (13) is
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) and a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) connected to the main game unit are provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means to perform role lottery,
It is provided with an information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
Winning information is determined according to the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means,
Based on the winning information, it is possible to derive different small winning combination / replaying combination winning information depending on the type of small winning combination or replaying combination.
It is configured so that the production group information corresponding to the small combination / re-game combination winning information can be derived and transmitted to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
It has a conversion table for converting the small combination / replay combination winning information into the effect group information, and the conversion table stores information about the effect group information.
When deriving the effect group information corresponding to the small combination / replay combination winning information, the effect group information A can be derived by performing X times calculation using the conversion table, and the small combination When deriving the effect group information corresponding to the small combination / replay combination winning information different from the combination / replay combination winning information, the effect group number B is calculated Y times using the conversion table. It is a rotating cylinder type game machine characterized in that it is configured so that it can be derived.

The rotating cylinder type game machine according to this aspect (14) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, push order display device D270) capable of displaying information.
Winning information and ball output information are determined according to the result of the lottery by the role lottery means to perform the role lottery.
It is configured so that the ball ejection information corresponding to a certain winning information and the ball ejection information corresponding to another winning information can be determined as the same information.
In a game in which the predetermined winning information is determined by at least the winning combination lottery means under the condition controlled to the predetermined notification state, the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined winning information is set. It is configured so that identifiable information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, push order display device D270).
It is a rotating cylinder type gaming machine characterized in that a lottery related to control of the predetermined notification state can be executed based on the ball ejection information.

P-turning type game machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input reception sensor D20s 1st input sensor, D30s 2nd input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 operation status indicator D200 credit count indicator, D210 insert count indicator D220 bet button, D230 medal tray D240 Discharge port, D250 special game status display device D260 keyhole, D270 payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C Main control chip, M50 reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Game interval minimum timer S Sub control board , S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 rotating body backlight S40 effect display device, SC sub-control chip E power supply board, E10 power switch H medal payout device, H10s first payout sensor H20s second payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disk, H50a Disc rotation axis H60 game medal outlet, H70 discharge urging means H80 hopper motor K rotating board, K10 rotating body motor K20 rotating body sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button

Claims (1)

With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Predetermined display means and
With the given lamp
The main control means to control the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub-control means to control the production
The main control means
Lottery means to draw lots and
It is equipped with a storage means that stores a specific table for deriving the production group information.
The lottery result that can be determined by the lottery means includes a first lottery result and a second lottery result.
In the game in which the first lottery result is determined, it is possible to stop and display the symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In the game in which the second lottery result is determined, it is possible to stop and display the symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the second operation mode.
As a game section, it has a normal section and an advantageous section.
In the game in which the first lottery result is determined in the normal section, the effect group information can be derived from the specific table by using a specific address as a reference address and the information corresponding to the first lottery result as an offset value. It is configured so that group information can be transmitted to the sub-control means.
In the game in which the second lottery result is determined in the normal section, the specific address is used as the reference address, the information corresponding to the second lottery result is used as the offset value, and the effect group information can be derived from the specific table. It is configured so that the production group information can be transmitted to the sub-control means.
The production group information derived in the game in which the first lottery result is determined and the production group information derived in the game in which the second lottery result is determined are the same information.
In the game in which the first lottery result is determined in the normal section, the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified by the predetermined display means.
In the game in which the first lottery result is determined in the advantageous section, there is a case where the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is notified by the predetermined display means.
If the conditions for starting the special gaming state are met, the special gaming state is configured to start.
It is configured so that it can be notified that it is an advantageous section by lighting the predetermined lamp.
When a game in which the number of times the game is executed in the advantageous section becomes a predetermined number of times is executed, the advantageous section is configured to end.
If a game in which the number of times the game is executed in the advantageous section is a predetermined number of times is executed in the special game state and the end condition of the special game state is not satisfied in the game, the next game is the normal section and the special game state. A rotating game machine characterized in that it is configured to be.